https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&user=Alexs&feedformat=atom High5Wiki - User contributions [en] 2024-03-28T18:44:58Z User contributions MediaWiki 1.35.11 https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Updates_and_Revisions&diff=6172 Updates and Revisions 2016-08-16T17:22:41Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>Note: SME is not able to do automatic updates because all users need to be out of SME for the updates. It&#039;s up to the customer to look for updates either here, from SME New Features &amp; addons &gt; Latest Features and Release Notes, or our twitter page [https://twitter.com/high5software @High5Software]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;<br /> [[SME 9.0 New Features &amp; Functionality]]&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;<br /> [[SME 8.1 - Revision History]]&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;<br /> [[SME 8.0 - Revision History]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> [[SME 8.0 – New Features &amp; Functionality]]&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;<br /> [[SME 7.2 - Revision History]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> [[SME 7.2 – New Features &amp; Functionality]]&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;<br /> [[SME 7.1 – Revision History]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> [[SME 7.1 - New Features &amp; Functionality]]&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;<br /> [[SME 7.0 – Revision History]]&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;<br /> [[SME 6.3 - 7.1 Legacy Builds]]&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;<br /> <br /> Contact High 5 Software to inquire about upgrading to the latest version of SME.<br /> Upgrade now and explore the many new features including mobile features.</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory_Assemblies&diff=6162 Inventory Assemblies 2016-08-11T16:52:03Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>SME9 now has inventory assemblies capability to support light manufacturing, build to stock, assembly of components for customer equipment and more.<br /> <br /> Inventory Assembly operation in SME 9:<br /> &lt;h3&gt;Creating Assembly and Build List&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> First step is to identify assembly parts and create the build list as follows:<br /> # Go to the inventory item you want as an assembly<br /> # Select &quot;This is an Assembly&quot; in the Details and Settings Tab<br /> ## This creates a new tab &quot;Assemblies&quot;<br /> ## [[File:AssemblyFlag.png]]<br /> # Create the Build List<br /> ## Select the Assemblies Tab and Build List sub tab<br /> ## Select Add Build Item to add items that are part of the assembly<br /> ## [[File:AssemblyBuildList.png]]<br /> ## Select various items for the build list:<br /> ### Select Inventory for material or parts items making up the assembly. Pick the item from the inventory list and select the quantity.<br /> ### [[File:AssemblySelectInventory.png]]<br /> ### Select Service items for services or charges to the assembly item. For example this could be a build process service or time from a worker or subcontractor. Pick the service item, select quantity and set the labor cost for the assembly service.<br /> ### [[File:AssemblyService.png]]<br /> ### Select Add labor to add labor time to the assembly. Select the quantity (usually in hours) and the labor cost.<br /> ### [[File:AssemblyLabor.png]]<br /> # Edit and Delete<br /> ## To edit items on the build list, select the item and select Edit Build Item<br /> ## To remove an item on the build list, select the item and select Delete<br /> ## [[File:AssemblyBuildEdit.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Assembly Build Orders&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> Assembly Build order can be created from the assembly item or from the Assembly Build Order module<br /> # From the Assembly Item select Assemblies&gt;Build Orders tab and select Create Build<br /> ## [[File:AssemblyCreateBuild.png]]<br /> ## Select Generate Item List to populate the build list<br /> ## Optionally set the Assigned To, Build Code, Date Due, and Quantity to build if you want more than one assemblies built.<br /> # Assembly Build Orders Module<br /> ## This module is used to create and perform the builds.<br /> ## When an assembly build is created it will be in pending state until the build is completed.<br /> ## [[File:AssemblyBuildOrders.png]]<br /> # Perform the Build by selecting Actions&gt;Complete Assemblies<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Assembly Build Order Advanced Features&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> Assembly builds allow you to generate purchase orders (PO&#039;s) for the parts on the build, Allocate specific parts for example serialized parts or from other warehouses, perform strict builds, and reserve inventory for the builds<br /> # Assembly Build Order Actions:<br /> ## Print Packet can be setup to print a group of reports for the build<br /> ## Generate List will populate or repopulate the build item list<br /> ## Generate PO for JIT Items will generate a PO only for the Just in Time (JIT) items where you don&#039;t have stock.<br /> ## Generate PO for Allocated AND JIT Items<br /> ## Allocation will allow picking specific parts for the build similar to [[Material Allocation]]<br /> ## Complete Assemblies will create the assemblies. <br /> ### When this is run the materials will be depleted and the assembly item will add stock.<br /> ### [[File:CompleteAssemblies.png]]<br /> ### Select the amount you want to build now. You can create a build order for multiple quantities but then only build as needed.<br /> ### Select &quot;Do Strict Builds&quot; if you want to only build if there is available stock for all the parts.<br /> ## Complete Max &#039;strict&#039; Builds. This will only build if all the stock is available and allocated and will not run if items are JIT (negative)<br /> ## Complete Max Builds quickly performs all the builds based on the quantity of builds requested.<br /> ## Reserve Allocated Inventory will set all parts from allocated to reserved.<br /> ## Jump to Inventory will jump back to the assembly inventory item.<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Assembly like functionality prior to SME 9&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> SME also has other features for supporting assembly type operations available in versions prior to 9.0: Here are a couple options for assemblies:<br /> # [[Packages]]: SME Packages have features similar to QuickBooks groups and assemblies. SME has options for how to price the package (by included items or fixed pricing). It also handles inventory management for the components. This approach is good if you have more fixed packages.<br /> # Order Hierarchy (see [[Service &amp; Install_Orders#Add_Text_for_Grouping_and_Subtotaling_Items]]: Orders in SME allow hierarchical structure. You can add the top level item &quot;Widget Assembly&quot; and then add unlimited material, service, and labor items within the assembly. Each sub-item can be set to hide in the report forms. This approach is good for dynamic assemblies that are built to order or unique for each order.<br /> # Packages AND Hierarchy: When you add a package to an order it shows it in hierarchical form. You can then add additional special items to that assembly. This approach is good if most of the assembly is standard but a few items are special.<br /> # Internal Order and PO: Create an internal Order for your company will all the sub-parts for an assembly (this would deplete the parts), then create an internal PO for the finished assembly to add the finished system into your inventory (this would add the assembly to your stock). This approach is good if you want to track labor and costs for building the assembly and you want strict control and tracking of the internal order and PO, however this approach add some overhead.<br /> <br /> Note on QuickBooks sync with SME: SME will only sync Inventory groups into SME as packages. Inventory assemblies in QB are NOT synced into SME.</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory_Assemblies&diff=6161 Inventory Assemblies 2016-08-11T16:49:47Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>SME9 now has inventory assemblies capability to support light manufacturing, build to stock, assembly of components for customer equipment and more.<br /> <br /> Inventory Assembly operation in SME 9:<br /> &lt;h3&gt;Creating Assembly and Build List&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> First step is to identify assembly parts and create the build list as follows:<br /> # Go to the inventory item you want as an assembly<br /> # Select &quot;This is an Assembly&quot; in the Details and Settings Tab<br /> ## This creates a new tab &quot;Assemblies&quot;<br /> ## [[File:AssemblyFlag.png]]<br /> # Create the Build List<br /> ## Select the Assemblies Tab and Build List sub tab<br /> ## Select Add Build Item to add items that are part of the assembly<br /> ## [[File:AssemblyBuildList.png]]<br /> ## Select various items for the build list:<br /> ### Select Inventory for material or parts items making up the assembly. Pick the item from the inventory list and select the quantity.<br /> ### [[File:AssemblySelectInventory.png]]<br /> ### Select Service items for services or charges to the assembly item. For example this could be a build process service or time from a worker or subcontractor. Pick the service item, select quantity and set the labor cost for the assembly service.<br /> ### [[File:AssemblyService.png]]<br /> ### Select Add labor to add labor time to the assembly. Select the quantity (usually in hours) and the labor cost.<br /> ### [[File:AssemblyLabor.png]]<br /> # Edit and Delete<br /> ## To edit items on the build list, select the item and select Edit Build Item<br /> ## To remove an item on the build list, select the item and select Delete<br /> ## [[File:AssemblyBuildEdit.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Assembly Build Orders&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> Assembly Build order can be created from the assembly item or from the Assembly Build Order module<br /> # From the Assemly Item select Assemblies&gt;Build Orders tab and select Create Build<br /> ## [[File:AssemblyCreateBuild.png]]<br /> ## Select Generate Item List to populate the build list<br /> ## Optionally set the Assigned To, Build Code, Date Due, and Quantity to build if you want more than one assemblies built.<br /> # Assembly Build Orders Module<br /> ## This module is used to create and perform the builds.<br /> ## When an assembly build is created it will be in pending state until the build is completed.<br /> ## [[File:AssemblyBuildOrders.png]]<br /> # Perform the Build by selecting Actions&gt;Complete Assemblies<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Assembly Build Order Advanced Features&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> Assembly builds allow you to generate purchase orders (PO&#039;s) for the parts on the build, Allocate specific parts for example serialized parts or from other warehouses, perform strict builds, and reserve inventory for the builds<br /> # Assembly Build Order Actions:<br /> ## Print Packet can be setup to print a group of reports for the build<br /> ## Generate List will populate or repopulate the build item list<br /> ## Generate PO for JIT Items will generate a PO only for the Just in Time (JIT) items where you don&#039;t have stock.<br /> ## Generate PO for Allocated AND JIT Items<br /> ## Allocation will allow picking specific parts for the build similar to [[Material Allocation]]<br /> ## Complete Assemblies will create the assemblies. <br /> ### When this is run the materials will be depleted and the assembly item will add stock.<br /> ### [[File:CompleteAssemblies.png]]<br /> ### Select the amount you want to build now. You can create a build order for multiple quantities but then only build as needed.<br /> ### Select &quot;Do Strict Builds&quot; if you want to only build if there is available stock for all the parts.<br /> ## Complete Max &#039;strict&#039; Builds. This will only build if all the stock is available and allocated and will not run if items are JIT (negative)<br /> ## Complete Max Builds quickly performs all the builds based on the quantity of builds requested.<br /> ## Reserve Allocated Inventory will set all parts from allocated to reserved.<br /> ## Jump to Inventory will jump back to the assembly inventory item.<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Assembly like functionality prior to SME 9&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> SME also has other features for supporting assembly type operations available in versions prior to 9.0: Here are a couple options for assemblies:<br /> # [[Packages]]: SME Packages have features similar to QuickBooks groups and assemblies. SME has options for how to price the package (by included items or fixed pricing). It also handles inventory management for the components. This approach is good if you have more fixed packages.<br /> # Order Hierarchy (see [[Service &amp; Install_Orders#Add_Text_for_Grouping_and_Subtotaling_Items]]: Orders in SME allow hierarchical structure. You can add the top level item &quot;Widget Assembly&quot; and then add unlimited material, service, and labor items within the assembly. Each sub-item can be set to hide in the report forms. This approach is good for dynamic assemblies that are built to order or unique for each order.<br /> # Packages AND Hierarchy: When you add a package to an order it shows it in hierarchical form. You can then add additional special items to that assembly. This approach is good if most of the assembly is standard but a few items are special.<br /> # Internal Order and PO: Create an internal Order for your company will all the sub-parts for an assembly (this would deplete the parts), then create an internal PO for the finished assembly to add the finished system into your inventory (this would add the assembly to your stock). This approach is good if you want to track labor and costs for building the assembly and you want strict control and tracking of the internal order and PO, however this approach add some overhead.<br /> <br /> Note on QuickBooks sync with SME: SME will only sync Inventory groups into SME as packages. Inventory assemblies in QB are NOT synced into SME.</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_8.1_-_Revision_History&diff=6014 SME 8.1 - Revision History 2016-02-29T16:36:21Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>&#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /02/05/2016/ Version: 8.1.5.104&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Set vendor name field from tech certification screen<br /> *System/Modified/Images in text fields not getting correctly embedded since a component update broke the logic to embed the image.<br /> *Reports/Modified/Tech code 135 now rebuilds standard reports and cleans up custom reports<br /> *Reports/Modified/Keep the report name in the caption of the designer<br /> *Reports/Fixed/Speed when opening reports<br /> *Orders/Time Sheets/Deleting a time sheet record was not always recalculating the time fields<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /02/15/2016/ Version: 8.1.5.106&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Tech certification added to the custom tables<br /> *System/Added/Vendor lookup added to tech certifications<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /02/11/2016/ Version: 8.1.5.105&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/After creating a new order set the focus on the order summary<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /02/05/2016/ Version: 8.1.5.104&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Flag item discounts as nontaxable regardless of default setting<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /02/04/2016/ Version: 8.1.5.103&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Infinite loop issue for updating orders with many serialized items<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Issue opening orders with CL in the HTML string.<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Package export. Items not set as summarized if export set as summarized<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /02/02/2016/ Version: 8.1.5.102&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Getting seat count when logged in as Admin<br /> *Reports/Modified/Prompt when running tech code 12916 asking if you want to keep custom reports<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /01/29/2016/ Version: 8.1.5.101&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Reports/Fixed/Inventory Snapshot report<br /> *Reports/Modified/Tech Code to delete all custom reports and restore only standard reports-12916<br /> *Reports/Modified/Tech Code 802 - now prompts to backup only custom reports for uploading to High5<br /> *Reports/Modified/All High5 reports will be prefixed with the word &#039;Standard&#039;<br /> *Reports/Modified/When opening designer make sure all reports have a file<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /01/28/2016/ Version: 8.1.5.100&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Reports/Modified/Report editing taking too long to open up when editing a report<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /01/25/2016/ Version: 8.1.5.99&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Scheduled Services/Fixed/Day count was off by 1 due to leap year<br /> *Orders/Fixed/If Assigned To was a Work Group the work group name would not populate<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Issue when selecting items from mobile<br /> *Inventory Transfer/Fixed/If the transfer does not have a detail connection relink the data or create a new link and use it<br /> *System/Modified/Information on the Class prompt dialogue pop-up<br /> *System/Added/Default Price Book. Setting is under: Setup&gt; Company&gt; Customer Defaults&gt; Rates &amp; Charges Defaults&gt; Price Book.<br /> *System/Issues/Modified to integrate better with auto incoming email<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /01/14/2016/ Version: 8.1.5.98&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Modified/Rewrote data import from Order Items tab to include cost and retail<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Removed vendor update prompt when the vendor flag in Setup&gt; Company&gt; Inventory is &#039;UnChecked&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Will now update inventory if any markup flags are set<br /> *Inventory/Added/Tech Code to batch process all inventory items with any Markup flags set<br /> *System/Added/Class requirement for PO module now optional<br /> *Of the above items the PO Class &amp; Vendor prompt are new flags on the Setup&gt; company&gt; inventory page in SME.<br /> [[File:InventoryOptions.98.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /01/12/2016/ Version: 8.1.5.97&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Allow non inventory to be RMA&#039;d<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Set Labor Cost to the Service Item labor Cost when entered from mobile<br /> *System/Modified/SQL functionality to address speed issues in very active databases<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Allow importing of QB items when QB allows duplicate QB ID&#039;s - Tax Related<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /12/22/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.96&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Cannot drag an order to Dispatch that has an Order Status set to &#039;Not&#039; show in Dispatch<br /> *Inventory/Added/Option to not prompt to update Vendor Items - &#039;Advanced Vendor Options&#039;<br /> *Batch Print/Modified/Filter out Voided Orders<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Calculating taxes on Fixed Rate records<br /> *System/Modified/Functionality for saving records<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /12/15/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.95&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Order Status/Order Status changing on orders where items had already been received.<br /> *Purchase Order/Modified/Reorder quantity pulling from incorrect record<br /> *Purchase Order/Modified/Batch PO initializing from wrong routine<br /> *Maintenance Contracts/Fixed/Could not remove invoice from contract<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/When on non-inventory item the Stock &amp; Material Detail tabs were still showing. They should not.<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /12/14/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.94&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Functionality for SQL 2012 and beyond<br /> *System/Modified/Functionality for record locking<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /12/10/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.93&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Stock Add form not closing<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /11/12/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.92&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Removing POItems causing order items to go into a JIT status when linked and the POItem had not been received. Which could cause Invoiced items to go into a JIT status.<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /11/02/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.91&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Cost zeroing out when added to the order<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /10/28/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.90&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Permission to delete closed Purchase orders flag<br /> *Orders/Added/Unavailable time records now calculate scheduled hours.<br /> *System/Added/Autorun tech code to calculated scheduled hours on future unavailable records. <br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /10/14/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.89&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Reconcile/Fixed/The label on allocation screen for needed count to fulfill required action<br /> *Inventory/Reconcile/Added/Button on allocation screen to auto revert reserved items to allocated status until count needed is met<br /> *Inventory/Reconcile/Modified/Moved the prompt to close batch to AFTER the reconciliation logic has taken place, and displays the number of unreconciled records remaining that require further action.<br /> *Inventory/Reconcile/Modified/When creating material detail for physical count use current cost/retail from inventory<br /> *Inventory/Reconcile/Fixed/Spelling for &#039;physical count record not found&#039; message<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /10/12/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.88&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Vendors/Modified/Added Cost and Retail to the update logic for Vendor Items<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /10/09/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.87&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Added/Link Service Item to Wage Item<br /> *Orders/Added/When Changing service item initialize the wage item<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Selection button disabled on editors<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Order Items tab spelling error<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /10/05/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.86&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Modified/Opened Labor Cost to allow editing after invoicing. Note: the Cost can only be adjusted if the Billing status or Price Book does not link Scheduled and Billing<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /10/03/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.85&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Utilities/Modified/Inventory Reconciliation now has a button to Accept all items in the batch. Note: You must do Import Physical Counts prior to accepting all items.<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /09/30/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.84&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Labor Editor Tech lookup was not placing selection in the Tech field<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /09/22/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.83&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *PO/Added/Ability to update inventory cost and retail from the DEFAULT LANDED vendor/vendor items<br /> *Orders/Modified/If user cannot edit invoiced orders they also cannot edit the line items in any way, if the line item has been invoiced. If user can edit invoiced orders, they can also edit the line items, unless the line items are fully invoiced, in which case, specific fields are blocked. If user has ability to edit orders they can add line items to invoiced orders.<br /> *System/Fixed/Lists - Service Codes were causing SME to freeze when edited<br /> *Vendor Items/Added/Update options after editing record<br /> *Inventory/Added/Prompt to update all Vendor Items if select fields have changed<br /> *Vendor Items/Added/Vendor Items can be updated when select fields on the inventory item changes<br /> *Vendor/Added/Action menu item to add vendor items when the vendor is a parent vendor<br /> *Vendor/Fixed/Child vendors were updating from parent based on ParentID and not the ParentUID<br /> *Inventory/Added/Logic to clone vendor item record (if found) from the inventory default vendor for each child vendor (if found, and vendor item doesn&#039;t exist for vendor&#039;s default zone)<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /09/14/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.82&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Modified/Allow editing of selected fields when the order is fully invoiced.<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Update landed cost from PO<br /> *Vendors/Added/MSRP field<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /09/04/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.81&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Search now excludes Voided orders<br /> *System/Fixed/Tax mode was backwards. Using U.S. taxes in Canadian mode<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /08/30/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.80&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory Reconciliation/Fixed/Sort on Item Name was not sorting<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /08/28/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.79&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Work Group filtering when editing a labor entry with only the work group selected<br /> *Customer/Fixed/Error when deleting a customer<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Class check now checking in PO module<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Total Cost not updating based on quantity<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /08/20/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.78&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Errors converting when item records have null values from historical data<br /> *Inventory Recon/Converting imported records to a batch<br /> *SQLink/Modification/Use name instead of user name for sales person import<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Set is active if user does not have a tech ID<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /08/19/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.77&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Labor/Fixed/Error creating new labor in Canadian version<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /08/14/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.76&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Not released<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /08/03/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.75&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory Snapshot/Modified/Rewrote logic used to generate the inventory snapshot due to issues when there are 1m records<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /07/31/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.74&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Error when adding a new record and there was a default service item assigned<br /> *Utilities/Modified/Clone logic now includes optional settings for cloning Customers/Vendors/Inventory/Service Items/Employees<br /> *Invoicing/Fixed/Bug with refunds screen<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 07/24/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.73/8.1.4.27&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Search View Export/Excel export now working from all views<br /> *Customer/Fixed/Duplicating customers now working correctly<br /> *System/Modification/Inventory Recondition/Added Dates to the Batch Selector and the grid. Added Closed field.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Settings/fixed : Set billable flag when record not assigned SLA category, or SLA category set to no charge<br /> *SQLink/Added/Notes/Send &#039;What I Did&#039; on notes<br /> *SQLink/Added/Timesheets/If timesheet doesn&#039;t have payroll item, then user order/proposal task, THEN user default<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 07/01/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.72&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Move Tax logic back to the executable due to SQL issues merging the data<br /> *Utilities/Fixed/Running inventory recreate details<br /> *PO/Fixed/Items not getting set as received when received<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/30/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.71&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Not hiding commission info on totals tab<br /> *PO/Modified/Do not recalculate PO counts if nothing received<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/29/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.70\SQLink 8.1.5.23&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Vendors/Modified/Do not export if the vendor is an SME only vendor<br /> *SQLink/Added/Parent Vendor only import/export<br /> *SQLink/Added/Export only Parent Vendors if the option is set<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/23/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.69&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Tax group name causing error when editing or creating new records<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Could not edit labor when invoiced count equaled zero<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/19/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.68/SQLink 8.1.4.22&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/PO not exporting correctly when Customer name not in QB<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Selecting stock after it has been set to JIT or Allocated<br /> *Setup/Fixed/User Setup not restricting editing when not allowed<br /> *Reports/Modified/Now limiting query when opening a report to edit<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Include blank Zones in dropdowns<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Query when selecting options<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/OK button error when no record was selected<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/11/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.67 - Not released&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/06/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.66&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Could not edit text lines<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Customer was dropped when exporting a PO created from orders<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/05/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.65&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Next Date prompt was locked on requesting a next date when it was already set<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/Set the next date from the order generation, if available, next date, or current date<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/When saving line item set the next generation if the order is in edit/insert mode<br /> *System/Modified/Show taxes on inventory &amp; service items if SME is in Canadian mode<br /> *System/Modified/Use the tax code on the items from labor/services/inventory<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Double Click on order in grid jumps to the correct order<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Package items were not getting set as on PO<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/04/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.64&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Taxes/Add ability to set item tax on the items<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Add the item tax when adding the item to an order regardless of any other tax setting<br /> *System/Utilities/Added feature to Clone the database<br /> *Customer/Fixed/Editing customer equipment maintenance activities in Windows 8/server 2012<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/03/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.63&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation now has closed flag for physical count batches<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Reconciliation dates getting set on items that were loaded in the batch but not adjusted<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation - close all batches before creating a new batch<br /> *Inventory/Added/Inventory Reconciliation history table<br /> *Inventory/Added/Ability to reconcile by individual item or by batch<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/03/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.62&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Items not getting set as received if the items were in a package<br /> *Orders/Added/Site Notes to Notes menu<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/More fixes on Stock tab/Add Stock editor<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/28/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.61/SQLink 8.1.4.21&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Material editor error editing material<br /> *Customer Equipment/Fixed/Error adding equipment from the Customer Equipment module<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Item Editor Vendor Item search not loading<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Customer Equipment PO Status was not updating when an item was placed on a PO<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Item tab order number filled in wrong when the PO was created from a cloned order<br /> *Orders/Added/Site Notes to Notes menu<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/More fixes on Stock tab/Add Stock editor<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Invoices were exporting to QB with all items as non-tax due to changes in Canadian logic<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/27/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.60/SQLink 8.1.4.20&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Taxes/When calculating taxes do not round line items only round the Total to match QuickBooks.<br /> *System/Discounts/Set up Order level discounts on line item taxes (order must have a tax group or code).<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Stock Add form was calling the incorrect form.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Taxing to depend on the line item, not the inventory item.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Flagging taxable as false on records with float values for the field type.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Tax details sometimes filtered out when calculating Canadian item taxes.<br /> *System/Tax/Over rounding on tax line items.<br /> *System/Fixed/Taxes discounts in QuickBooks Canadian only apply to items with &#039;matching&#039; tax codes - i.e. if you have 3 items with HST, one item with P, and the item discount has &#039;HST&#039; code (and is applied before taxes), SME will only apply to the three HST items.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Flag to not update contacts between SME and QB. If Checked contacts will not import/export.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Flag to not set SME prefix.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Use PO Reference Number to SQLink options.<br /> *SQLink/Added/PO Items Not Billable to options. If set status on items will be Billable.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Tech Code, 360, to set the merge date on all fields so all info is not synced after a QuickBooks upgrade/update<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/18/2015/ Version: 8.1.2.59 - Limited Released/SQLink 8.1.3.19&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Setup/Taxes - set up SME to work in Canadian versions without QB<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/12/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.58/8.1.3.17&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Don&#039;t export reverse credits (auto generated in payments from invoices with negative balances)<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/08/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.58/8.1.3.16&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/When doing a resynch, don&#039;t flag overpayments and balancing payment for export<br /> *SQLink/Added/When exporting invoices using summarized totals, separate the negatives from the positive amounts, and flag negative amounts as non-taxable<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Returning error &#039;invoice not found&#039; when invoice billing company was different than payment billing company<br /> *SQLink/Added/Help function - given an invoice number, return all invoice IDs found in QB, and all invoice IDs found in SME for that number<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/05/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.57/8.1.3.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Payments/Modified/Added new parameter for online payments<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/28/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.56&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Forms no longer open in Edit mode unless something is actually changing on the form<br /> *Customer/Fixed/Error adding Prepaid hours<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Misspelling on form<br /> *Orders/Fixed/When converting set the &#039;Is Partial&#039; flag on the order task records<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Set the &#039;Is Fixed&#039; flag after calculating with the partial billable hours. This will allow the changing of Billable hours for tracking without affecting the order total<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Order task records with the &#039;Is Partial&#039; flag set will not implement changes<br /> *PO/Fixed/Error when receiving allocated items on an order<br /> *Payments/Modified/Will now accept a partial payment<br /> *Incoming Email/Modified/Now use phone number or email to parse out which company the incoming email is to generate a ticket for<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/23/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.55/SQLink 8.1.3.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Contacts/Modified/When adding new contacts, IF there is no customer UID set on the record, set the customer UID to the order UID. <br /> *Contacts/Modified/Tech Code to set Customer UID to Order UID on contacts with blank customer UID<br /> *System/Snapshot/Widen total fields due to issue when converting from old versions of SMP<br /> *Contacts/Added/Tech Code to update phones from contacts if the phone is on the contact but not the master table<br /> *Orders/Modified/Delete from Contacts if the Customer UID = Order UID<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/20/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.54/SQLink 8.1.3.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Reconciliation/Added Grouping to the editor grid<br /> *Inventory/Reconciliation/Added order number when item getting modified is on an order<br /> *SQLink/Postsynch/Set flags based on date and if exported &#039;When possible&#039; (Not possible for tech time and subcontractor)<br /> *SQLink/GL/Fixed formatting on GL export Total Amount<br /> *SQLink/Auto Logging/Save the log to a file when records exceed 5k. (Usually only happens on an initial import)<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/17.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.53&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation set up to utilize the batch id for tracking<br /> *Contacts/Modified/When canceling an order/invoice/proposal - Remove contacts added when a new customer record has been started in a module other than the customer module<br /> *System/Added/Tech code to clear out all contacts without a customer UID<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Order task records were not always updating when changed<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Item Editor was not always applying the Force JIT option when it was set<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.52&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation functionality testing<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.51/SQLink 8.1.3.13 &#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added color for items that are on PO / New Functionality<br /> *System/Setup/Added PO Received order status / New Functionality<br /> *System/Modified/User Group Override Labor cost functionality / New Functionality<br /> *Customer/Added/Default Order Status for Open &amp; Closed / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/PO Order Status setting / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Service Code default status / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/PO status logic - if set will notify user when all records are received / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Fill in Service Code from customer, if blank use order / New Functionality<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Text not showing on drop downs due to Font Color / New Functionality<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Color on popup to lighter color / New Functionality<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.25.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.50&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Updates/Change was dropping the DB permissions and was not able to reconnect them while building<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.24.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.49&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Not released<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.19.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.48&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Proposal/Fixed/Copy-Paste not working in Services Requested<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Labor editor not updating when using Bill Status of Equal Scheduled<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Bad field name error when cloning recurring orders<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Refresh added to view since dispatch was returning Record not found on some orders due to not refreshing the view<br /> *Proposal/Fixed/Dot Net error when changing Billing status on task records<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Error when manually generating a recurring order<br /> *System/Modified/Removed POS customers that were created for Point of Sale app which is no longer used<br /> *Recurring/Modified/Option to not generate outgoing emails when orders are entered from the customer portal - New Functionality<br /> *System/Modified/Stop allowing typing if text goes beyond the field length. Match to Customer Portal/Tech Portal<br /> *Setup/Added/Fonts now a system setting - New Functionality<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Transfer fixed so last line is now updated and re-editing is not necessary<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.10.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.47&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Added/Batch info to the order, ID, Batch Date - New Functionality<br /> *Invoice/Added/Create Recurring order form an invoice<br /> *Orders/Added/Create a Recurring order from an order<br /> *Setup/Added/Recurring Order settings as customer defaults - New Functionality<br /> *Invoice/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Orders/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Proposals/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Batch Print/Modified/Now includes Batch Date in the Batch ID dropdown<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/When copying to recurring order, do not copy package breakout items. packages change over time, so their items are not included on recurring orders<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/Can now add packages<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.46/SQLink 8.1.3.12&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Moved change notification from the grid to the table since drop downs were not filling in correctly<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Invalid function error when adding a valid tech to an order<br /> *SQLink/Added/Date range for re-export of data<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.05.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.45/SQLink 8.1.3.11&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Do not prompt for re-export if nothing changed on PO when saving<br /> *SQLink/Modified/For Canadian companies fill item tax info since items are used to set tax status<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Error when deleting a subtotal from Order Items screen<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.04.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.44&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/F10 Search for open PO&#039;s<br /> *System/Added/Tools&gt; Advanced&gt; Set default font on memo fields - New functionality<br /> *Invoice/Fixed/Adding items to an itemized invoice causing errors<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.02.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.43&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Added/To Be emailed and To Be Printed to Details and Settings tab<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.42/8.1.3.10&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Views/Modified/Filters always case sensitive<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Do not export employee info from SME if Tech Time unchecked <br /> *SQLink/Added/Resync date so user can select how far back in SME history to go <br /> *SQLink/Modified/All open invoices will be exported, only payments tied to invoices will be exported, only PO&#039;s with received items will be exported<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.25.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.41/8.1.3.8&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Payments/Added/Refund payment transaction info<br /> *Payments/Added/Added payment methods for online refunds<br /> *Payments/Added/Never allow export of refunded online payments<br /> *SQLink/Added/Pull in tax/Non Tax if not already pulled in<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Bad field name on tax logic<br /> *System/Fixed/Errors when converting custom tables from older versions<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.17.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.40&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch Print/Modified/Added drop down for batch printing orders<br /> *Batch Print/Added/Batch ID to grid batch printing orders<br /> *Batch Print/Added/Column customization to grid<br /> *Orders/Modified/Proposal/Order/Project triggers to only total if something changed<br /> *Payments/Added/Refund payment logic<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.39&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Recurring Order/Fixed/Invoice drop down not filling<br /> *Orders/Added/Settings to maintain recurring batch order information<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.14.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.38&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Setup/Credit Card Processing/Allow editing of settings<br /> *System/Batch ID&#039;s/Added &#039;last&#039; batch run to tables<br /> *System/Tables/Added Is Clone if originated from a cloned record<br /> *Recurring Order/Added/Convert as invoice and bypass order<br /> *System/Added/setting for running batches on Recurring orders, recurring invoices, scheduled services<br /> *Customer/Added/If the customer is inactive clear credit card info<br /> *Orders-PO&#039;s/Added/Do not send emails until cloning is finished <br /> *System/Added/setting for running batches on Recurring orders, recurring invoices, scheduled services<br /> *System/Added/Auto generate recurring invoices/orders/services - New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Added : If the user is flagged to do the batch processes, (Preferences), check to see if the system flag has been set for batch (i.e. user flagged to do periodic maintenance, recurring settings have PM setup as &#039;include in batch). If set, use the batch processing for generation. This will be needed unless/until the site schedules jobs to do the batch processing instead. Batches now run the generation without interrupting SME processing.<br /> *System/Modified/Don&#039;t generate activity unless there is a record count<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.10.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.37&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Customer/Added/Customer/Store Credit Card grid<br /> *Setup/Added/Setup/Company/System/Enable Pay Pro flag<br /> *Invoice/Added/Pay Online option<br /> *Payments/Added/Pay Online option<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Do not override Cost/Price in the item editor when selecting stock<br /> *System/Modified/If a user is Inactive turn off the Logged In Flag<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.36&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Order tax handling <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.04.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.35/SQLink 8.1.2.7&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/DYN Export/Break out export files by month<br /> *System/Added/Table to store Credit card info per customer<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Added clear QB ID on PO tables<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Now matches existing wage item if it exists in SME<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.03.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.34&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/DYN Export/All exported invoices go out as &#039;in&#039;<br /> *System/Updates/Only rebuild indexes on tables with a modified structure<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.30.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.33/SQLink 8.1.2.6&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to stop importing vendors from QB and only export from SME to QB<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to clear all QB UID&#039;s and other imported QB info to allow SME to sync with a new QB Company file<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Only use the QB UID for searching in QB for an existing item on a re-sync<br /> *PO/Fixed/Bad field name in a PO export query<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.32/SQLink 8.1.1.5&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Added a tech code to turn off SQLink if a customer decided to stop using QB<br /> *System/DYN Export/Show QB ID flag<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Export of Partner Discounts to always be a positive number<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.21.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.31&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Data not getting set correctly if editing after closing the PO<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Creating multiple material detail records when : the cost had changed AND the item was not serialized AND the available quantity &lt; the po Item quantity (which resulted in a split condition)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.30&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Work Groups to the Assigned To lists for selection<br /> *System/Added/If the Assigned To is a Work Group set all new tasks for the Work Group<br /> *System/Added/Work Group editor added email field<br /> *Orders/Added/Work Group query for reporting<br /> *Orders/Added/Salesperson to Order Status table<br /> *Orders/Added/Work Group logic on item editor<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Check Work Group emails for Auto Outgoing emails<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Added salesperson to Auto Outgoing emails<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Work Group to task emails. If work group exists and has non blank email, use that email, otherwise, use tech&#039;s/vendor&#039;s email<br /> *Routines/Fixed/Misspelling of salesperson causing emails to stop going out<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.15.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.29&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Orders/Modified/Items can now be imported from Excel to fill purchase orders<br /> *System/Modified/No longer reports an error if license check fails<br /> *System/Modified/Grid speed issues <br /> *System/Modified/Set options on new databases<br /> *System/Modified/Hide Web Reports Option unless Web Reports are enabled on the database<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Right Click menu item &#039;Email Ticket&#039; now calls same form as the orders modules<br /> *System/Added/Option to disable multi-threading on grids for Windows 8 and server 2012<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.12.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.28&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Menu item to toggle all print flags if some are set they will clear and the others will set<br /> *RMA/Modified/When receiving RMA Item, if the permanent removal is not checked, always treat it as if the &#039;replace item&#039; were.<br /> *Orders/Modified/Some orders were never going to 100% invoiced due to item deletion and addition after initial invoice<br /> *System/Conversion/Triggers not correctly set when converting from versions prior to 8.0<br /> *System/Auto Email/Custom fields that match between modules were not getting filled in on automatically generated orders<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.09.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.27&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Editor on Material Detail tab was not filling information correctly<br /> *System/Conversion/Corrected auto run tech code<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.08.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.26&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Add to Company Equipment flag dropped when adding them to an order<br /> *System/Modified/Dynamics data export<br /> *System/Fixed/Message when logging into a database other than the default in multi database systems<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.07.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.25&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Further disabling of grid sorting<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Tax formatting was three places<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.24&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Limit license check to 2 tries before defaulting to temporary status<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.05.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.23&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Dataset not on edit mode<br /> *System/Modified/Temporary disabling of grids calling multiple table queries to fill the results<br /> *System/Added/Excel export to .xlsx extensions<br /> *System/Fixed/Data file path for the Grid Excel export option<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.18.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.22&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Modified/Material Editor/Location now read when the item is selected to avoid warehouse issues<br /> *System/Modified/Class now carries from Service Items through all modules to invoices<br /> *System/Modified/Maintenance Contract numbers now carry through in the ref# field to invoices generated from recurring invoices <br /> *Orders/Modified/Material Editor/Changing the warehouse on an item that was using a different warehouse no longer auto transfers the stock to the newly selected location<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.17.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.21&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Dynamics data export<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Labor Editor had an infinite loop when changing billable amount. Only happened when it was not associated with a scheduled amount change<br /> *System/Modified/Maintenance/Warranty Expiration/Now checks that minimum dates are set since if they are not SME could generate false records<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.17.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.20&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Auto Email/Fixed/Subject line character restrictions for special characters<br /> *System/Export/Modified Dynamics export<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.16.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.19&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Update now pulls from 8.1 update FTP folders<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.15.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.18&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Issue with Contract Number on editor<br /> *System/Fixed/Form Code not pulling in custom tab when form code is used<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Only reduce counts if they are greater than the received count<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.12.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.17/SQLink 8.1.1.3&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Journal entries not displaying on entering the tab<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.10.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.16/SQLink 8.1.1.2&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/PO Account ID in Link options<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to ignore the customer when only Billing Customers are stored in QuickBooks<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.08.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Export for Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.08.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Export for Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.06.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Export method for text export to MS Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.05.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.13&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/HTML text editor update to fix pasting images into SME<br /> *System/Fixed/Conversion when database names do not match SQL conventions<br /> *System/Modified/Error log messages<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.03.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.12&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/incorrect field name in vendor items query<br /> *System/Modified/Locking of data in SQL <br /> *System/Modified/Reduced attempts to write locked data from 10 tries to 5 in SQL <br /> *Orders/Service Items/Fixed/Issue when writing Class Name on Recurring generation<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.02.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.11&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Contacts/Filter by both Site and Billing<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Adding item to PO that was created from an order would fill in the order number<br /> *Maintenance Contracts/Fixed/Updating maintenance contract was resetting the Recurring Invoice start date<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.01.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.10&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Users/Fixed/Code value updates with user name changes<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Moved more processes to tables as opposed to temp tables<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Grid issue when selecting multiple items from the Partial Invoice screen was causing SME to crash<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Assets moved from temp table to permanent table<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Voided orders no longer show in Dispatch<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.24.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.9&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Tech Code/Runs tech code to revert all failed order conversions<br /> *SQLink/Updated/Now updated to SME 8.1<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.19.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.8&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Fields and tables for dynamic export<br /> *System/Added/Logic to fill the dynamic tables<br /> *Packages/Fixed/Error calculating package item totals when price is generated<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.18.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.7&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Error scrolling records when no options are set on settings tab<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Error when scrolling through combined invoices on the Service/Install tabs<br /> *Batch PO/Fixed/Trigger not getting re-initialized when updating<br /> *Recurring Invoices/Fixed/Error when posting Recurring Invoices.<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.12.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.6&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Batch PO/Added Item Number to grid<br /> *System/Modified/Orders/Made Require Service Code an option <br /> *System/Modified/Order/Added Allocated warning when adding orders to combined invoices<br /> *System/Modified/Order handling from SME Mobile was causing occasional duplicate order UID&#039;s<br /> *System/Fixed/Error logging and record update time/out issues<br /> *System/Fixed/Saving records under Customer Equipment was not writing info to the new table but placing them in the old table<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.11.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.5&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Fixed/Edit function in grid stopped working<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.7.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.4&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Activities/Fixed/Alarms returning way too many records after database rebuild<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.6.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.3&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Orders/History tabs not saving settings and displaying correctly<br /> *Proposals/Fixed/Fixed rates tab not calculating <br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Transfers not completing the last record on multiple record transfers<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.4.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.2&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Add/Zone filter to Proposal/Orders/Invoices to prevent &#039;Cannot add to order when adding from Dispatch&#039;<br /> *System/Add/Use Dispatch view for lookups when adding to dispatch. In some cases you may not see a refresh if you are on service and drag a proposal to dispatch<br /> *System/Fixed/Error when adding new records. UID was initialized in the incorrect place. Causing prompts for SLA &amp; Class re-initialization <br /> *System/Modified/Tech certification check only if there are labor task records<br /> *System/Updated/to latest component sets on all grids/dispatch controls/reporting controls/and data controls<br /> *System/Fixed/Batch PO/Filters not functioning as planned<br /> *System/Fixed/Error message on shutting down SME<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 10.31.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.1&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Added/Button to only close modified PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Added/Button for full regenerate of all PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Fill table now only fills required PO&#039;s instead of all PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Grid settings to improve speed<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Only add missing records to the grid instead of completely reloading the grid<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 10.30.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.1&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Dispatch id&#039;s to tech, vendor, service, install, proposal, invoice<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Uses temp table for labor, uses view data vs query and updates ( Now the ID&#039;s necessary for dispatch are on the tables)<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Tracked and fixed &#039;missing&#039; field errors when adding labor from project<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Creates view for labor and orders<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Modified/Added button to only close GENERATED records<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Added button for FULL regenerate<br /> *Purchase Order Bulk Import/Modified/Fill table now only generates REQUIRED records, vs all 5000 records<br /> *Purchase Order Bulk Import/Modified/Required records defined as &#039;close all records that have been generated or have a defined minimum level.<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Fixed/Grid settings to speedup process<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Modified/Only &#039;missing&#039; records are regenerated.</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Administration_Guides&diff=6004 SME Administration Guides 2016-02-15T18:19:24Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>&#039;&#039;&#039;Installing SME&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Installing SME]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Making a connection to your SME database]] &lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Setting up a client computer to run SME]] (Preferred method)&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Setting Up SME Client Users]]<br /> * [[Local installation of the SME executable]] (Not the preferred method)<br /> * [[Set up of initial company data connection]]<br /> * [[SME on Remote Desktop or RDP]]<br /> * [[SME Hosted Server]]<br /> * [[SME Server Move]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Updating SME&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Updating SME 7.2]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Exclusive Access]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Updating SME]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Upgrading - SME 7.1 to 7.2]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Upgrading - SME 7.0 to 7.1]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Upgrading - SME 6.3 - 7.0]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Backing up SME&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[SME Backups Best Practices]]<br /> * [[Backing up your SME database using MS SQL Management Studio]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Installing Add On Products for SME&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[SME Web Services Installation Guide]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Barcode for SME Installation Instructions]]<br /> * [[Tech Service for Android on SME Installation Instructions]]<br /> * [[Automated Email Installation]]<br /> * [[Web Services Update]]<br /> * [[SME POS Setup]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;SME Hosted/ Remote&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> * [[Remote Desktop Settings]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Importing into SME&#039;&#039;&#039; see: [[SME Import Export Process]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Before Importing - About UID]]<br /> * [[Importing Customers]]<br /> * [[Importing Contacts for Customers]]<br /> * [[Importing Inventory Items]]<br /> * [[Importing Leads]]<br /> * [[Importing contacts into Constant Contact]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Utilities]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;FAQ for Administrators&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[SQL Server Best Practices]]<br /> * [[SQLink Connection issues]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[FAQ - Connection Issues]]<br /> * [[Drop down fields not working]]<br /> * [[Licensing Issues]]<br /> * [[Out of Seats when you are not out]]<br /> * [[Regional Settings]]<br /> * [[Steps to create a new user profile]]<br /> * [[SKA Error 4 message when opening SME]]<br /> * [[Live Spelling - Reset Dictionary]]<br /> * [[End of Year Utilities]]<br /> * [[Email Settings]]<br /> * [[Recreating Inventory Detail Utility]]<br /> * [[SME and SQL Express]]<br /> * [[Named Piped Provider: Could not open a connection to SQL Server]]<br /> * [[Location Settings]]<br /> * [[FTP Error Reports]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_Help_Files&diff=6003 SQLink Help Files 2016-02-15T18:18:28Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>&#039;&#039;&#039;[[SQLink]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Syncing details between SME and QuickBooks<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[SQLink FAQ]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Browse frequently asked questions related to SQLink <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[SQLink Settings]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - This page defines all of the settings in SQLink<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[SQLink Client Setup]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - This page shows how to setup a client<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[SMP_ Items]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Learn about the SMP Items created in QuickBooks after your initial sync and how they are used<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[GL Entries for SME Inventory]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - If you maintain inventory items in SME only and not in QuickBooks, you must read this page.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Default Export to QuickBooks Settings]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Learn about the settings in SME to sync records to QuickBooks by default<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Common SQLink Errors]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - How to fix errors found in SQLink Error Log<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Syncing SME Invoices with QuickBooks]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Learn how to set invoices in SME to go to QuickBooks and how next invoice numbers work in SME<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Editing a Combined Invoice]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Learn how to edit a combined invoice in SME and how it updates the invoice that previously synced to QB.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Invoice Numbers in SME and QuickBooks]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Understand your options setting the next invoice number in SME<br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[SME Module Guides]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Reference guides to other modules in SME</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_Help_Files&diff=6002 SQLink Help Files 2016-02-15T18:17:03Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>&#039;&#039;&#039;[[SQLink]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Syncing details between SME and QuickBooks<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[SQLink FAQ]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Browse frequently asked questions related to SQLink <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[SQLink Settings]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - This page defines all of the settings in SQLink<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[SMP_ Items]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Learn about the SMP Items created in QuickBooks after your initial sync and how they are used<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[GL Entries for SME Inventory]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - If you maintain inventory items in SME only and not in QuickBooks, you must read this page.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Default Export to QuickBooks Settings]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Learn about the settings in SME to sync records to QuickBooks by default<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Common SQLink Errors]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - How to fix errors found in SQLink Error Log<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Syncing SME Invoices with QuickBooks]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Learn how to set invoices in SME to go to QuickBooks and how next invoice numbers work in SME<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Editing a Combined Invoice]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Learn how to edit a combined invoice in SME and how it updates the invoice that previously synced to QB.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[Invoice Numbers in SME and QuickBooks]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Understand your options setting the next invoice number in SME<br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;[[SME Module Guides]]&#039;&#039;&#039; - Reference guides to other modules in SME</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Administration_Guides&diff=6001 SME Administration Guides 2016-02-15T18:16:05Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>&#039;&#039;&#039;Installing SME&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Installing SME]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Making a connection to your SME database]] &lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Setting up a client computer to run SME]] (Preferred method)&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Setting Up SME Client Users]]<br /> * [[Local installation of the SME executable]] (Not the preferred method)<br /> * [[Set up of initial company data connection]]<br /> * [[SME on Remote Desktop or RDP]]<br /> * [[SME Hosted Server]]<br /> * [[SME Server Move]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Updating SME&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Updating SME 7.2]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Exclusive Access]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Updating SME]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Upgrading - SME 7.1 to 7.2]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Upgrading - SME 7.0 to 7.1]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Upgrading - SME 6.3 - 7.0]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Backing up SME&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[SME Backups Best Practices]]<br /> * [[Backing up your SME database using MS SQL Management Studio]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Installing Add On Products for SME&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[SME Web Services Installation Guide]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Barcode for SME Installation Instructions]]<br /> * [[Tech Service for Android on SME Installation Instructions]]<br /> * [[Automated Email Installation]]<br /> * [[Web Services Update]]<br /> * [[SME POS Setup]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;SME Hosted/ Remote&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> * [[Remote Desktop Settings]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Importing into SME&#039;&#039;&#039; see: [[SME Import Export Process]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Before Importing - About UID]]<br /> * [[Importing Customers]]<br /> * [[Importing Contacts for Customers]]<br /> * [[Importing Inventory Items]]<br /> * [[Importing Leads]]<br /> * [[Importing contacts into Constant Contact]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[Utilities]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;FAQ for Administrators&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[SQL Server Best Practices]]<br /> * [[SQLink Client Setup]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[SQLink Connection issues]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> * [[FAQ - Connection Issues]]<br /> * [[Drop down fields not working]]<br /> * [[Licensing Issues]]<br /> * [[Out of Seats when you are not out]]<br /> * [[Regional Settings]]<br /> * [[Steps to create a new user profile]]<br /> * [[SKA Error 4 message when opening SME]]<br /> * [[Live Spelling - Reset Dictionary]]<br /> * [[End of Year Utilities]]<br /> * [[Email Settings]]<br /> * [[Recreating Inventory Detail Utility]]<br /> * [[SME and SQL Express]]<br /> * [[Named Piped Provider: Could not open a connection to SQL Server]]<br /> * [[Location Settings]]<br /> * [[FTP Error Reports]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Main_Page&diff=5960 Main Page 2015-11-10T16:27:28Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>Welcome to the High 5 Software Wiki. This wiki provides documentation for Service Management Enterprise (SME) and for SME add-on products such as TechPortal for SME and CustomerPortal for SME.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTICE: High 5 Software does not support for Internet Explorer (IE) from Microsoft for Mobile Tech for SME, Tech Portal, Customer Portal and Mobile Subcontractor for SME. Please use FireFox, Chrome, Safari, or browsers on smartphones or tablets. We regret that Microsoft continues to make their browser non-standard and currently does not properly support some standard technologies we use in the portals. Since FireFox and Chrome are available as free downloads, we are not going to fight IE and waste valuable development resources. We are a Microsoft Silver Partner and like Microsoft&#039;s other technologies and rely on Microsoft Server and SQL Server, however, IE doesn&#039;t properly support the latest internet technologies. <br /> <br /> High 5 Software is now offering [[Hosting for QuickBooks and SME]], ask your [mailto:sales@high5software.com salesperson]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;High 5 Software provides service management software solutions for field service companies in a variety of industries. Focusing on companies that need to manage work orders, technicians, inventory, and customer equipment tracking. Industries such as telecom/interconnect installers, security, Information Technology (IT), Fire &amp; Safety, Fitness repair, HVAC, Electrical contractors, and many more rely on SME for daily business operations.<br /> <br /> <br /> [[File:ModuleGuides.png|link=SME Module Guides]][[File:AddOnGuide.png|link=SME Add-On Guides]][[File:Administration.png|link=SME Administration Guides]]&lt;br&gt;<br /> [[File:UpdatesRevisions.png|link=Updates and Revisions]] [[File:GettingStartedVideos.png|link=Getting Started]] [[File:CloudAccessThroughRDP.png|link=Cloud Access Through RDP]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> [[File:New-customers.jpg|link=New Customer Links]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:AddOnGuide.png&diff=5959 File:AddOnGuide.png 2015-11-10T16:27:00Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div></div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:AddOnGuides.png&diff=5958 File:AddOnGuides.png 2015-11-10T16:26:08Z <p>Alexs: Alexs uploaded a new version of File:AddOnGuides.png</p> <hr /> <div></div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:AddOnGuides.png&diff=5957 File:AddOnGuides.png 2015-11-10T16:25:10Z <p>Alexs: Alexs uploaded a new version of File:AddOnGuides.png</p> <hr /> <div></div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:AddOnGuides.png&diff=5956 File:AddOnGuides.png 2015-11-10T16:25:07Z <p>Alexs: Alexs uploaded a new version of File:AddOnGuides.png</p> <hr /> <div></div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Company&diff=5933 Company 2015-09-16T14:49:22Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>In the Setup module, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039; to setup user groups, customize lookup lists (drop down values), set customer defaults and more.<br /> <br /> &lt;u&gt;Setup Groups:&lt;/u&gt;<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Company Information&#039;&#039;&#039; – Upload you logo, select SME colors and set fiscal year starting date.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039; – Set password requirements, technician hours and other system settings.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – Set next order and invoice numbers, set default exporting to QuickBooks, set dispatch colors and various other order settings.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Customer Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039; – Set default values for customer records, create custom customer fields and decide how you want customer account numbers to be generated.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Lists&#039;&#039;&#039; – Customize the drop down values in fields throughout SME.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Common Services&#039;&#039;&#039; – Assign a key word to a block of text which you can enter into orders and notes throughout SME by selecting the keyword.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Notifications&#039;&#039;&#039; - Setup notification templates which you can assign to customers to alert user when taking action (e.g. alert user to not create an order for customer because they are past due or alert user when creating order that the customer is VIP) <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;User Groups&#039;&#039;&#039; - Each user needs to be assigned to a user group. The user group determines your user&#039;s permission to modules and features throughout SME. Setup user groups here. <br /> <br /> == Company Information ==<br /> In this section, you need to add your address and company contact information, upload a logo, select your fiscal year starting date and select SME colors.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Address Information:&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> The address entered here will display on reports such as service orders and invoices. Click Edit and enter your company address, phone, email and webpage. You might want your email address to be a generic address such as info@... Or sales@... <br /> <br /> [[File:CompanyInformation.jpg]]<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Upload Logo&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> The logo you upload here will display on reports.<br /> <br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; (on the left).<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Logo Options&#039;&#039;&#039; and select &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Browse for your logo and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Open&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Company Colors&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> The Company Color you select will show as the main background color in SME. The Secondary color is the color that shows on various buttons (image below)<br /> <br /> [[File:Colors.jpg]]<br /> <br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Company Color&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # In the Color window, select color and click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> <br /> Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; and the color will change.<br /> <br /> <br /> == System ==<br /> <br /> The System Defaults section is where you will set password requirements, technician work hours for dispatch, and various settings and defaults described below.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:SystemDefaults_Part1.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;u&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Password Requirements&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/u&gt; (&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/span&gt; in image above)<br /> This is where you can require your users to use passwords to log in and set password length requirements. You set the passwords for your users in the [[Users]] section of the Setup module.<br /> &lt;br&gt;Password Expires after &#039;X&#039; days. Upon expiration the user is presented with a window to change their password.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: password cannot be longer than 8 characters. <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;u&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Technician Work Hours&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/u&gt; (&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/span&gt; in image above)<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Tech Hours Per Day&#039;&#039;&#039; - When you schedule a technician either in dispatch or using labor item, this is the number of hours that will be scheduled by default. You can increase or decrease hours.<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Start Time&#039;&#039;&#039; The Order Dispatch window will use the start time and hours to determine the hours you can schedule your techs.<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Dispatch Refresh in seconds&#039;&#039;&#039; - enter how frequently you want the dispatch window to refresh. Usually 0. <br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Dispatch Hours Per Day&#039;&#039;&#039; - Enter the number of hours you want to show on the dispatch calendar. (If &#039;&#039;&#039;Start Time&#039;&#039;&#039; is 7am, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Hours per Day&#039;&#039;&#039; is 10 hours, then dispatch calendar shows 7am - 5pm)<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;- &lt;u&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Scan Button and Command Line&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/u&gt; (&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;3&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/span&gt; in image above)<br /> &lt;br&gt;If you have a scanner that can accept a command line then you can set this up and within stored docs you can launch your scanner for scan or display. We have a customer that developed a product that works with the Scan Command Line in SME and provides full document storage and scanning. If you use this scanner then you can set it up and within stored docs you can launch your scanner for scan or display. We can put you in touch with them to purchase their scanner product. If you don&#039;t go with these solutions, you would need some other application that would communicate between SME and the scanners. <br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;u&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Additional System Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/u&gt; (&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;4&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/span&gt; in image below)<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:SystemDefaults_Part2.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;Below is a description of each setting, however most of the settings in this section are self explanatory.<br /> &lt;br&gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Reset YTD totals at the start of fiscal year&#039;&#039;&#039; – YTD totals are found in the Customer Accounts tab, showing the customer totals year to date.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Hide data path in status bar&#039;&#039;&#039; – the status bar is at the bottom of SME.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Proposal Approval to Close or Convert to Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, proposals require approval before they can convert them to orders. If not approved yet, users will receive a message prompting approval.<br /> &lt;br&gt;When converting proposals:<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy services requested to services requested&#039;&#039;&#039; - services requested in proposal will copy to services requested on the order generated by the proposal.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy services requested to services performed&#039;&#039;&#039; - services requested in proposal will copy to services performed on the order generated by the proposal.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Site Address on Dispatch Page&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, the site address will show on the order scheduled on the Order Dispatch window.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Default the Customer Billing Address to the Site Address&#039;&#039;&#039; – If this is checked, the address you type in the site address tab will carry over to the billing address tab. This saves you from having to click “set from site” on the billing tab.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Default the Customer Mailing Address to the Site Address&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this is checked, the address you type in the site address tab will carry over to the mailing address tab. This saves you from having to click “set from site” on the mailing tab.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Calculate Commission Based on Profit&#039;&#039;&#039; – If this is checked, the salesperson’s commission will be calculated off the profit, not the total.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Limit Overview to Current/Fiscal Year&#039;&#039;&#039; – The overview is found by clicking [[File:OverviewButton.jpg]] in the main form elements tabs.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Allow Journal Edits&#039;&#039;&#039; - this is related to Journal Notes. Currently not functional.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Include blank zone for item selection&#039;&#039;&#039;- With this checked, if a work order has a zone, then stock would be available to reserve from in warehouses with no zone as well as matching zones.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Auto Notify on New Issues&#039;&#039;&#039; - <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Automatically backup data at ___time every day&#039;&#039;&#039; - A backup file will be created and saved in your SME User folder at the time specified<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of digits after the decimal point for currency&#039;&#039;&#039; – Windows now handles this through regional settings. Go to [[Decimal Spaces]] to see how to setup.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Random order numbers&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, order numbers will be generated randomly<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Max Activity Check __ Minutes&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;SLA Status Time Check __ Minutes&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Calculate finance charges when invoice is __ days past due&#039;&#039;&#039; - see [[Late Fees / Finance Charges]] page for more information<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Class Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, user cannot save customer record until the Class is selected.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;When entering payments, show subcontractor costs&#039;&#039;&#039; – If this option is checked, when a payment is received SME it will check all the orders and highlight any service items with subcontractors selected and show the cost.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Lock Salesperson&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, can&#039;t change salesperson on proposal<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;On Service items, base Subcontractor cost on item price&#039;&#039;&#039; – When adding a service item to an order, there is a percent markup field for the service and you can also select a subcontractor to perform the service. If this option is NOT check, the percent markup is multiplied by the service cost to get the price. If this box IS checked, the price is fixed and cost paid to subcontractor is based on a percentage off the price.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wait time ___ seconds&#039;&#039;&#039; - Waits x number of seconds after a record is posted to see if an activity pops. Should be 0<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Default Document Directory&#039;&#039;&#039; - The directory select here will always be the default directory selected when you go to add a stored document to a record. This eliminates the need to always browse to the correct folder where the files are saved that need to be added to the record.<br /> <br /> == Order ==<br /> <br /> The Order Defaults section in the Setup Module where you will set various defaults such as colors associated with orders, beginning order and invoice numbers, finance charge past due dates. <br /> <br /> When getting started with SME, you may want to set the next order numbers, proposal number or next PO number. If you previously used a number system, you can set SME to pick up where you left off here. <br /> <br /> The &#039;&#039;&#039;Next Invoice #&#039;&#039;&#039; will be populated from QuickBooks after your initial sync. View the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Invoice Numbers in SME and QuickBooks]]&#039;&#039;&#039; page for information on keeping the next invoice number in sync between SME &amp; QB. If you don&#039;t want QB to update the next invoice number in SME, you&#039;ll need to change the setting in SQLink showin on the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Invoice Numbers in SME and QuickBooks]]&#039;&#039;&#039; page. <br /> <br /> [[File:NextOrderNumbers.jpg]]<br /> <br /> # In SME, select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Order&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> # Fill out the next number in the section on the top left (circled in the image to the right)<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Default Export to QuickBooks Options&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> [[File:DefaultExportToQBSettings.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks, choose which SME forms export to QuickBooks by default. Click [[Default Export to QuickBooks Settings]] to learn how.<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Order Options&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:SetupCompanyOrderSettings.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t tax labor only orders&#039;&#039;&#039; - taxes won&#039;t be calculated if the only charge on an order is labor.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require at least one assigned tech to post an order&#039;&#039;&#039; - For invoices - can’t post without a labor record. For orders – can’t close the order without a labor record<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Automatically close fully invoiced orders&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, when you invoice an open order, SME will automatically close the order.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require order to be closed to invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, you won&#039;t be able to invoice an open order. The order will have to be closed before invoicing.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Compliance Codes&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, when adding a labor item to an order you will be forced to select a compliance code if one isn&#039;t already on the order.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Service Codes&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, when adding a labor item to an order you will be forced to select a service code if one isn&#039;t already on the order.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Enforce Tech Compliance&#039;&#039;&#039; - If you need to use tech certification and compliance, please see [[Tech Compliance]] for more information<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Set To Be Printed flag on new invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; - For new invoices created, the to be printed flag will be checked. This is useful if you are using the batch print feature in SME. See [[Batch Print/Email Invoices]] for more info.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Set To Be Mailed flag on new invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; - For new invoices created, the to be emailed flag will be checked. If you are syncing invoices to QB, if there is no email address in the invoice, an error will occur on the sync, so if you are using this setting, make sure you have email addresses entered.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Last line message for invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; - the text typed here appears at the bottom of some invoice reports.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Excise Tax&#039;&#039;&#039; -Enter the dollar range excise tax is applied to. You will need to also go to the customer record &gt; Rates tab and set the Excise Tax rate and check Calculate Excise tab for every customer that needs it applied. You can set a default excise rate for every new customer record created in the Customer defaults section of setup.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Calculate finance charge when invoice is __ days past due&#039;&#039;&#039; - Enter the number of days late you want SME to use to calculate finance charge.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Base past due on invoice date not due date&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Display customer overdue message&#039;&#039;&#039; - if a customer account has a Net 30, Net 60 or Net 90 amount greater than 0 (found on Customer record &gt; Account tab), when creating an order or invoice for that customer you will receive a pop up message. You can click OK and continue to create the record for them.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Auto publish dispatch changes&#039;&#039;&#039; - If you are using Field Scheduler, this option would automatically send out the meeting requests to techs when labor is scheduled. If not checked, you can click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Publish Changes&#039;&#039;&#039; button in dispatch to sent meeting requests to techs when you are ready.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Auto Deliver Allocated on Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this option checked, any material on an order with the Item Status of &#039;&#039;&#039;Allocated&#039;&#039;&#039; will be changed to &#039;&#039;&#039;Delivered&#039;&#039;&#039; when you close the order and stock will be depleted. This saves a step from having to manually reserve stock to deplete stock.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Ignore Labor Hours on Material&#039;&#039;&#039; - In an inventory item, you can set labor hours associated with the material. When adding material to an order, a labor item would open with the hours. Check this setting and you will not be prompted to schedule labor for material that has labor hours.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter Services on Labor&#039;&#039;&#039; - Limits the service item list in labor editor to those services included on that order.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Clear order settings on Clone&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, when you clone a service order, the following fields will be cleared: Reference #, Assigned To, PO#, Taken By, Service Code, Billing Status.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Include blank zone for item selection&#039;&#039;&#039; - When doing searches that involve zones, this setting allows items with no zone to still show in list when zone is defined for the search.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Update Order Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this is unchecked, the assigned to field on an order will populate with the technician on the first labor item added to the order. If this is checked, the assigned to field will update with every tech added in a labor item or when a tech is changed on the labor item.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;In the Order Dispatch window you can identify whether an order is open, closed, invoiced or past due by color. You can choose colors that make sense for your team.<br /> # Locate the &#039;&#039;&#039;Dispatch Colors for Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; section (image below)<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Open Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; and select the color from the color picker. Follow the same for closed, invoiced and past due orders.<br /> # Uncheck &#039;&#039;&#039;White Font&#039;&#039;&#039; to change the font to black.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> <br /> [[File:DispatchColors.jpg]]<br /> <br /> == Inventory ==<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory Address and Email&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:Setup_InventoryAddress.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Use Strict Inventory Control&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;With Use Strict Inventory Control checked, you cannot invoice an order with jit or allocated counts. Stock must be reserved for items before they can be invoiced.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:Setup_StrictInventoryControl.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory SnapShot Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;Set how frequently you want SME to take a snapshot of your inventory<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Take partial snapshot as used&#039;&#039;&#039; - every time an inventory item is used, the item SnapShot tab will be updated for the item. <br /> CAUTION: This option utilizes extensive resources to capture snapshot data for every transactional change of inventory. This option is not recommended for live system and instead should just be used in special circumstances such as testing.<br /> &lt;br&gt; - &#039;&#039;&#039;Take complete snapshot every X days&#039;&#039;&#039; - SME will update the SnapShot tab on all items based on the frequency set. The first person to login for the day that this triggers will launch a separate background process to save the snapshot data for all inventory.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:InventorySnapShotSettting.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;Go to the inventory item and click the SnapShot tab to see the snapshot entries made for the item (image below)<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:InventorySnapShotTabDetails.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Base COGS on Date of Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;This is a setting related to the General Ledger entries made in QuickBooks for material invoiced. If your inventory items are in both SME and QuickBooks, this has no impact for you. If you have SME to use [[GL Entries for SME Inventory]] then you would choose this option. See the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[GL Entries for SME Inventory]]&#039;&#039;&#039; page for more information.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:BaseCOGSOnDateOfInvoice.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Additional Inventory Setup Options&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:InventoryDefaults_Setup.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Include subcontractors for item vendors&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, vendors that are subcontractors will show in the vendor drop down in the Add Item to Order window. <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:Setup_INventory_INcludeSubsInVendorDropdown.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Force JIT&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, any inventory items created in SME will have &#039;&#039;&#039;Force JIT&#039;&#039;&#039; checked by default.<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t Update Cost when Receiving from PO&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, any inventory items created in SME will have &#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t Update cost when receiving from PO&#039;&#039;&#039; checked.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:InventoryDefaults.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Check Equipment for Duplicate Serial Numbers&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, when equipment record is added SME will autocheck other equipment records for duplicate serial number<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t Autoclose POs&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, when all items are received on a PO, the PO won&#039;t automatically close.<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Limit Items Vendors&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, SME will limit the items on a PO to items listed for the vendor.<br /> <br /> == Customer Defaults ==<br /> <br /> In the Customer Defaults section you can set default values for the various customer fields and create custom fields for the customer record.<br /> <br /> Watch the video below or read the instructions below on setting the customer defaults.<br /> &lt;videoflash&gt;b20ssBbRSmA&lt;/videoflash&gt;<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;To set SME to generate account numbers for your customers<br /> # In SME, select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click Edit on the left.<br /> # Check &#039;&#039;&#039;Generate Account Number&#039;&#039;&#039; and fill out the &#039;&#039;&#039;Next Customer Account #&#039;&#039;&#039; field.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Account Defaults&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> You can set default values for certain fields in the customer record.<br /> <br /> # In SME, select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click Edit on the left.<br /> # On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Account Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, select the drop down value you want to populate the field automatically when a new customer record is created.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> <br /> &lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt; ** NOTE ** &lt;/span&gt; To add values to the drop down fields on the Account Defaults section, see the [[Lookup Lists]] tutorial.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Warn on Past Due&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this is checked, when you create a new customer, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add customer message on past due&#039;&#039;&#039; flag will be checked. With that checked, when the customer is past due the message field will populate with Account is Past Due on the Customer details tab. (image below)<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:AccountIsPastDue.png]]<br /> <br /> == Lookup Lists ==<br /> <br /> Throughout SME, there are drop down fields. You can customize the drop down lists using the Setup module as long as you have the permissions to do so set by your SME Administrator.<br /> <br /> Click [[SME Lookup Lists]] to read definitions of each of the items in Lookup Lists.&lt;br&gt;<br /> <br /> View the following video or follow the instructions below to customize your Lookup Lists in SME.<br /> &lt;videoflash&gt;IKmKGTeUlQE&lt;/videoflash&gt; <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Customizing Lookup Lists&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> # In SME, select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Lookup Lists&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> # Select the label name assocaited with the drop down list you need to edit.<br /> # On the right, you may see existing drop down values. Use the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons (shown below) at the bottom to add a new value, edit a value or delete a value.<br /> <br /> [[File:LookupLists_Add_Edit_Delete.jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt; **NOTE** &lt;/span&gt; The values in the drop down list sort alphabetically. If you want them to display in a specific order, type a number in front of the value as shown in the image below.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:LookupLists_Numbered(1).jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Delete a value in the Lookup List&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> # Click Edit in the Setup Module on the left.<br /> # Select the label name associated wtih the drop down you want to delete.<br /> # Select the value you want to delete.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039; at the bottom.<br /> # If there is a record in SME with the value selected you are about to delete, you will receive a warning. If you choose to delete the value anyway, any record that had that value selected will now be blank.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039; if you want to go forward deleting the value.<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Make a value in the Lookup List Inactive&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> Making a drop down value inactive will keep the value assigned to any existing record that has the value selected, but it won&#039;t be available in the drop down list for any new records that you create.<br /> <br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Setup Module on the left.<br /> # Select the label name associated with the drop down you want to edit.<br /> # Select the value you want to mark inactive.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Uncheck &#039;&#039;&#039;Is Active&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Setup Module on the left.<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Set the Default Order Status for new, closed or invoiced orders&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> 1. Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; &gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039; &gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Lists&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Order Statuses&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Lookup List<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Either edit an exiting status or click New to create a new one<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. If you want the status to default when you create a new order, check&#039;&#039;&#039; Default status on new orders&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you want to set a default when you close an order, go to the status or create a status and check &#039;&#039;&#039;Default status on closed orders&#039;&#039;&#039;. For the status you want to set as default when you invoice an order, go to the status or create the status and check &#039;&#039;&#039;Default status on invoiced orders&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:OrderStatusDefault.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;Note - If you reopen an order, the order status won&#039;t be updated.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;If you are using TechPortal and your techs are closing orders in the field, you can set a default status for closed orders such as &quot;field work complete&quot;. That way, when you search your closed orders, you can tell which orders were recently closed by technicians in the field.<br /> <br /> == Common Services ==<br /> Common Services provides a way for you to assign a key word to a block of text. When typing notes or filling out a work order, instead of typing the text you can select the key word you set up in Common Services.<br /> <br /> Below is a video to watch how to set up Common Services, or you can read the instructions below.<br /> <br /> &lt;videoflash&gt;lPOXN9trbLs&lt;/videoflash&gt;<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Setting up Common Services&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;When a Common Service is created, everyone on your team will see it. You may want to designate one person on your team to set up the Common Services so the list can stay organized.<br /> <br /> # In SME, click the Setup module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Common Services&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; in the menu on the left.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # In the window that opens, type a description for the Common Service. This is the name that will identify the block of text and it will display in the common service list. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # In the window that opens, type the block of text. Use the formatting tools at the top of the window to add bullets, numbering and to change the font color or size.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Common Services Setup Window (on the left).<br /> <br /> The Common Service is now created. Any user can now open up notes or create a work order, right click in the text window and select Common Services to use your template.<br /> <br /> == Notifications ==<br /> <br /> Notifications can be set for special customers. Special can either be good or bad. For example, set notifications on customers that are behind on their balance so that no additional service is performed until the pay past balances. Or set notifications on important customers that notify managers or other key personnel that new service is being performed for these VIP customers.<br /> <br /> First you will create the generic notification rules and message, and then you can assign the notification to your customers.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup notification:&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. In the Setup module, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Notifications&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Fill out the notification:<br /> <br /> [[File:NotifyTypes.jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039; – this is the notification template name.<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039; – select the module the action is taken in that prompts the notification (e.g. creating a service order would be service)<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; – select the action that will prompt the notification (e.g. creating a new service order would be “add”, closing a proposal would be “close”)<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Allow Alert User&#039;&#039;&#039; –an alert is a pop up window that will open when a user takes the action in the module setup in the notification. The message that pops up in the alert is setup by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Message&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Notify Types window.<br /> <br /> [[File:NotificationAlert.jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Allow Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – checking this will send an email to the address specified when adding the notification to a customer when a notification is prompted.<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Message&#039;&#039;&#039; – Click Message and enter the alert message that the user will see pop up when they trigger a notification. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;. <br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Assign notification to customers:&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Go to the customer record.<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Select the Notifications tab.<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. In the Customer Notifications window:<br /> <br /> [[File:AssignNotification.jpg]]<br /> <br /> * Notification Type – select the notification template you created in this drop down field<br /> * Send Email to – if you want an email to be send when the notification is triggered, check here and type the email address.<br /> * Alert User – check here if you want the pop up alert to show on the users screen when they trigger a notification.<br /> * Message – click here to edit the alert pop up message for this customer.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;5. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; and the notification is setup for the customer.<br /> <br /> == User Groups ==<br /> Each user group has permissions within SME. Assign users to a user group and the user will inherit the permissions assigned in the group. Examples of different user groups you can create are:<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;Admin Group - by default this group is created<br /> &lt;br&gt;Sales Group – this group may have rights to all modules except for receivables and only read access to the inventory module.<br /> &lt;br&gt;Full Rights Group – this group has access to all modules and all tabs and features within each module<br /> <br /> Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[User Groups]]&#039;&#039;&#039; to learn more.<br /> <br /> == Payments Gateway ==<br /> This section of the setup module is related to the Point of Sale application that works with SME.<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> [[File:PaymentsGateway.png]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Company&diff=5932 Company 2015-09-16T14:34:26Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>In the Setup module, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039; to setup user groups, customize lookup lists (drop down values), set customer defaults and more.<br /> <br /> &lt;u&gt;Setup Groups:&lt;/u&gt;<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Company Information&#039;&#039;&#039; – Upload you logo, select SME colors and set fiscal year starting date.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039; – Set password requirements, technician hours and other system settings.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – Set next order and invoice numbers, set default exporting to QuickBooks, set dispatch colors and various other order settings.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Customer Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039; – Set default values for customer records, create custom customer fields and decide how you want customer account numbers to be generated.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Lists&#039;&#039;&#039; – Customize the drop down values in fields throughout SME.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Common Services&#039;&#039;&#039; – Assign a key word to a block of text which you can enter into orders and notes throughout SME by selecting the keyword.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Notifications&#039;&#039;&#039; - Setup notification templates which you can assign to customers to alert user when taking action (e.g. alert user to not create an order for customer because they are past due or alert user when creating order that the customer is VIP) <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;User Groups&#039;&#039;&#039; - Each user needs to be assigned to a user group. The user group determines your user&#039;s permission to modules and features throughout SME. Setup user groups here. <br /> <br /> == Company Information ==<br /> In this section, you need to add your address and company contact information, upload a logo, select your fiscal year starting date and select SME colors.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Address Information:&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> The address entered here will display on reports such as service orders and invoices. Click Edit and enter your company address, phone, email and webpage. You might want your email address to be a generic address such as info@... Or sales@... <br /> <br /> [[File:CompanyInformation.jpg]<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Upload Logo&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> The logo you upload here will display on reports.<br /> <br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; (on the left).<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Logo Options&#039;&#039;&#039; and select &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Browse for your logo and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Open&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Company Colors&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> The Company Color you select will show as the main background color in SME. The Secondary color is the color that shows on various buttons (image below)<br /> <br /> [[File:Colors.jpg]]<br /> <br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Company Color&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # In the Color window, select color and click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> <br /> Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; and the color will change.<br /> <br /> <br /> == System ==<br /> <br /> The System Defaults section is where you will set password requirements, technician work hours for dispatch, and various settings and defaults described below.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:SystemDefaults_Part1.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;u&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Password Requirements&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/u&gt; (&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/span&gt; in image above)<br /> This is where you can require your users to use passwords to log in and set password length requirements. You set the passwords for your users in the [[Users]] section of the Setup module.<br /> &lt;br&gt;Password Expires after &#039;X&#039; days. Upon expiration the user is presented with a window to change their password.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: password cannot be longer than 8 characters. <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;u&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Technician Work Hours&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/u&gt; (&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/span&gt; in image above)<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Tech Hours Per Day&#039;&#039;&#039; - When you schedule a technician either in dispatch or using labor item, this is the number of hours that will be scheduled by default. You can increase or decrease hours.<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Start Time&#039;&#039;&#039; The Order Dispatch window will use the start time and hours to determine the hours you can schedule your techs.<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Dispatch Refresh in seconds&#039;&#039;&#039; - enter how frequently you want the dispatch window to refresh. Usually 0. <br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Dispatch Hours Per Day&#039;&#039;&#039; - Enter the number of hours you want to show on the dispatch calendar. (If &#039;&#039;&#039;Start Time&#039;&#039;&#039; is 7am, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Hours per Day&#039;&#039;&#039; is 10 hours, then dispatch calendar shows 7am - 5pm)<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;- &lt;u&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Scan Button and Command Line&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/u&gt; (&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;3&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/span&gt; in image above)<br /> &lt;br&gt;If you have a scanner that can accept a command line then you can set this up and within stored docs you can launch your scanner for scan or display. We have a customer that developed a product that works with the Scan Command Line in SME and provides full document storage and scanning. If you use this scanner then you can set it up and within stored docs you can launch your scanner for scan or display. We can put you in touch with them to purchase their scanner product. If you don&#039;t go with these solutions, you would need some other application that would communicate between SME and the scanners. <br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;u&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Additional System Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/u&gt; (&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;4&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/span&gt; in image below)<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:SystemDefaults_Part2.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;Below is a description of each setting, however most of the settings in this section are self explanatory.<br /> &lt;br&gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Reset YTD totals at the start of fiscal year&#039;&#039;&#039; – YTD totals are found in the Customer Accounts tab, showing the customer totals year to date.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Hide data path in status bar&#039;&#039;&#039; – the status bar is at the bottom of SME.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Proposal Approval to Close or Convert to Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, proposals require approval before they can convert them to orders. If not approved yet, users will receive a message prompting approval.<br /> &lt;br&gt;When converting proposals:<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy services requested to services requested&#039;&#039;&#039; - services requested in proposal will copy to services requested on the order generated by the proposal.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy services requested to services performed&#039;&#039;&#039; - services requested in proposal will copy to services performed on the order generated by the proposal.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Site Address on Dispatch Page&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, the site address will show on the order scheduled on the Order Dispatch window.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Default the Customer Billing Address to the Site Address&#039;&#039;&#039; – If this is checked, the address you type in the site address tab will carry over to the billing address tab. This saves you from having to click “set from site” on the billing tab.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Default the Customer Mailing Address to the Site Address&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this is checked, the address you type in the site address tab will carry over to the mailing address tab. This saves you from having to click “set from site” on the mailing tab.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Calculate Commission Based on Profit&#039;&#039;&#039; – If this is checked, the salesperson’s commission will be calculated off the profit, not the total.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Limit Overview to Current/Fiscal Year&#039;&#039;&#039; – The overview is found by clicking [[File:OverviewButton.jpg]] in the main form elements tabs.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Allow Journal Edits&#039;&#039;&#039; - this is related to Journal Notes. Currently not functional.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Include blank zone for item selection&#039;&#039;&#039;- With this checked, if a work order has a zone, then stock would be available to reserve from in warehouses with no zone as well as matching zones.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Auto Notify on New Issues&#039;&#039;&#039; - <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Automatically backup data at ___time every day&#039;&#039;&#039; - A backup file will be created and saved in your SME User folder at the time specified<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of digits after the decimal point for currency&#039;&#039;&#039; – Windows now handles this through regional settings. Go to [[Decimal Spaces]] to see how to setup.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Random order numbers&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, order numbers will be generated randomly<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Max Activity Check __ Minutes&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;SLA Status Time Check __ Minutes&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Calculate finance charges when invoice is __ days past due&#039;&#039;&#039; - see [[Late Fees / Finance Charges]] page for more information<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Class Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, user cannot save customer record until the Class is selected.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;When entering payments, show subcontractor costs&#039;&#039;&#039; – If this option is checked, when a payment is received SME it will check all the orders and highlight any service items with subcontractors selected and show the cost.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Lock Salesperson&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, can&#039;t change salesperson on proposal<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;On Service items, base Subcontractor cost on item price&#039;&#039;&#039; – When adding a service item to an order, there is a percent markup field for the service and you can also select a subcontractor to perform the service. If this option is NOT check, the percent markup is multiplied by the service cost to get the price. If this box IS checked, the price is fixed and cost paid to subcontractor is based on a percentage off the price.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wait time ___ seconds&#039;&#039;&#039; - Waits x number of seconds after a record is posted to see if an activity pops. Should be 0<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Default Document Directory&#039;&#039;&#039; - The directory select here will always be the default directory selected when you go to add a stored document to a record. This eliminates the need to always browse to the correct folder where the files are saved that need to be added to the record.<br /> <br /> == Order ==<br /> <br /> The Order Defaults section in the Setup Module where you will set various defaults such as colors associated with orders, beginning order and invoice numbers, finance charge past due dates. <br /> <br /> When getting started with SME, you may want to set the next order numbers, proposal number or next PO number. If you previously used a number system, you can set SME to pick up where you left off here. <br /> <br /> The &#039;&#039;&#039;Next Invoice #&#039;&#039;&#039; will be populated from QuickBooks after your initial sync. View the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Invoice Numbers in SME and QuickBooks]]&#039;&#039;&#039; page for information on keeping the next invoice number in sync between SME &amp; QB. If you don&#039;t want QB to update the next invoice number in SME, you&#039;ll need to change the setting in SQLink showin on the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Invoice Numbers in SME and QuickBooks]]&#039;&#039;&#039; page. <br /> <br /> [[File:NextOrderNumbers.jpg]]<br /> <br /> # In SME, select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Order&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> # Fill out the next number in the section on the top left (circled in the image to the right)<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Default Export to QuickBooks Options&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> [[File:DefaultExportToQBSettings.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks, choose which SME forms export to QuickBooks by default. Click [[Default Export to QuickBooks Settings]] to learn how.<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Order Options&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:SetupCompanyOrderSettings.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t tax labor only orders&#039;&#039;&#039; - taxes won&#039;t be calculated if the only charge on an order is labor.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require at least one assigned tech to post an order&#039;&#039;&#039; - For invoices - can’t post without a labor record. For orders – can’t close the order without a labor record<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Automatically close fully invoiced orders&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, when you invoice an open order, SME will automatically close the order.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require order to be closed to invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, you won&#039;t be able to invoice an open order. The order will have to be closed before invoicing.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Compliance Codes&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, when adding a labor item to an order you will be forced to select a compliance code if one isn&#039;t already on the order.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Service Codes&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, when adding a labor item to an order you will be forced to select a service code if one isn&#039;t already on the order.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Enforce Tech Compliance&#039;&#039;&#039; - If you need to use tech certification and compliance, please see [[Tech Compliance]] for more information<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Set To Be Printed flag on new invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; - For new invoices created, the to be printed flag will be checked. This is useful if you are using the batch print feature in SME. See [[Batch Print/Email Invoices]] for more info.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Set To Be Mailed flag on new invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; - For new invoices created, the to be emailed flag will be checked. If you are syncing invoices to QB, if there is no email address in the invoice, an error will occur on the sync, so if you are using this setting, make sure you have email addresses entered.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Last line message for invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; - the text typed here appears at the bottom of some invoice reports.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Excise Tax&#039;&#039;&#039; -Enter the dollar range excise tax is applied to. You will need to also go to the customer record &gt; Rates tab and set the Excise Tax rate and check Calculate Excise tab for every customer that needs it applied. You can set a default excise rate for every new customer record created in the Customer defaults section of setup.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Calculate finance charge when invoice is __ days past due&#039;&#039;&#039; - Enter the number of days late you want SME to use to calculate finance charge.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Base past due on invoice date not due date&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Display customer overdue message&#039;&#039;&#039; - if a customer account has a Net 30, Net 60 or Net 90 amount greater than 0 (found on Customer record &gt; Account tab), when creating an order or invoice for that customer you will receive a pop up message. You can click OK and continue to create the record for them.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Auto publish dispatch changes&#039;&#039;&#039; - If you are using Field Scheduler, this option would automatically send out the meeting requests to techs when labor is scheduled. If not checked, you can click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Publish Changes&#039;&#039;&#039; button in dispatch to sent meeting requests to techs when you are ready.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Auto Deliver Allocated on Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this option checked, any material on an order with the Item Status of &#039;&#039;&#039;Allocated&#039;&#039;&#039; will be changed to &#039;&#039;&#039;Delivered&#039;&#039;&#039; when you close the order and stock will be depleted. This saves a step from having to manually reserve stock to deplete stock.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Ignore Labor Hours on Material&#039;&#039;&#039; - In an inventory item, you can set labor hours associated with the material. When adding material to an order, a labor item would open with the hours. Check this setting and you will not be prompted to schedule labor for material that has labor hours.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter Services on Labor&#039;&#039;&#039; - Limits the service item list in labor editor to those services included on that order.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Clear order settings on Clone&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, when you clone a service order, the following fields will be cleared: Reference #, Assigned To, PO#, Taken By, Service Code, Billing Status.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Include blank zone for item selection&#039;&#039;&#039; - When doing searches that involve zones, this setting allows items with no zone to still show in list when zone is defined for the search.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Update Order Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this is unchecked, the assigned to field on an order will populate with the technician on the first labor item added to the order. If this is checked, the assigned to field will update with every tech added in a labor item or when a tech is changed on the labor item.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;In the Order Dispatch window you can identify whether an order is open, closed, invoiced or past due by color. You can choose colors that make sense for your team.<br /> # Locate the &#039;&#039;&#039;Dispatch Colors for Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; section (image below)<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Open Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; and select the color from the color picker. Follow the same for closed, invoiced and past due orders.<br /> # Uncheck &#039;&#039;&#039;White Font&#039;&#039;&#039; to change the font to black.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> <br /> [[File:DispatchColors.jpg]]<br /> <br /> == Inventory ==<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory Address and Email&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:Setup_InventoryAddress.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Use Strict Inventory Control&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;With Use Strict Inventory Control checked, you cannot invoice an order with jit or allocated counts. Stock must be reserved for items before they can be invoiced.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:Setup_StrictInventoryControl.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory SnapShot Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;Set how frequently you want SME to take a snapshot of your inventory<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Take partial snapshot as used&#039;&#039;&#039; - every time an inventory item is used, the item SnapShot tab will be updated for the item. <br /> CAUTION: This option utilizes extensive resources to capture snapshot data for every transactional change of inventory. This option is not recommended for live system and instead should just be used in special circumstances such as testing.<br /> &lt;br&gt; - &#039;&#039;&#039;Take complete snapshot every X days&#039;&#039;&#039; - SME will update the SnapShot tab on all items based on the frequency set. The first person to login for the day that this triggers will launch a separate background process to save the snapshot data for all inventory.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:InventorySnapShotSettting.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;Go to the inventory item and click the SnapShot tab to see the snapshot entries made for the item (image below)<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:InventorySnapShotTabDetails.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Base COGS on Date of Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;This is a setting related to the General Ledger entries made in QuickBooks for material invoiced. If your inventory items are in both SME and QuickBooks, this has no impact for you. If you have SME to use [[GL Entries for SME Inventory]] then you would choose this option. See the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[GL Entries for SME Inventory]]&#039;&#039;&#039; page for more information.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:BaseCOGSOnDateOfInvoice.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Additional Inventory Setup Options&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:InventoryDefaults_Setup.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Include subcontractors for item vendors&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, vendors that are subcontractors will show in the vendor drop down in the Add Item to Order window. <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:Setup_INventory_INcludeSubsInVendorDropdown.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Force JIT&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, any inventory items created in SME will have &#039;&#039;&#039;Force JIT&#039;&#039;&#039; checked by default.<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t Update Cost when Receiving from PO&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, any inventory items created in SME will have &#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t Update cost when receiving from PO&#039;&#039;&#039; checked.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:InventoryDefaults.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Check Equipment for Duplicate Serial Numbers&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, when equipment record is added SME will autocheck other equipment records for duplicate serial number<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t Autoclose POs&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, when all items are received on a PO, the PO won&#039;t automatically close.<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Limit Items Vendors&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, SME will limit the items on a PO to items listed for the vendor.<br /> <br /> == Customer Defaults ==<br /> <br /> In the Customer Defaults section you can set default values for the various customer fields and create custom fields for the customer record.<br /> <br /> Watch the video below or read the instructions below on setting the customer defaults.<br /> &lt;videoflash&gt;b20ssBbRSmA&lt;/videoflash&gt;<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;To set SME to generate account numbers for your customers<br /> # In SME, select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click Edit on the left.<br /> # Check &#039;&#039;&#039;Generate Account Number&#039;&#039;&#039; and fill out the &#039;&#039;&#039;Next Customer Account #&#039;&#039;&#039; field.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Account Defaults&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> You can set default values for certain fields in the customer record.<br /> <br /> # In SME, select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click Edit on the left.<br /> # On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Account Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, select the drop down value you want to populate the field automatically when a new customer record is created.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> <br /> &lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt; ** NOTE ** &lt;/span&gt; To add values to the drop down fields on the Account Defaults section, see the [[Lookup Lists]] tutorial.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Warn on Past Due&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this is checked, when you create a new customer, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add customer message on past due&#039;&#039;&#039; flag will be checked. With that checked, when the customer is past due the message field will populate with Account is Past Due on the Customer details tab. (image below)<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:AccountIsPastDue.png]]<br /> <br /> == Lookup Lists ==<br /> <br /> Throughout SME, there are drop down fields. You can customize the drop down lists using the Setup module as long as you have the permissions to do so set by your SME Administrator.<br /> <br /> Click [[SME Lookup Lists]] to read definitions of each of the items in Lookup Lists.&lt;br&gt;<br /> <br /> View the following video or follow the instructions below to customize your Lookup Lists in SME.<br /> &lt;videoflash&gt;IKmKGTeUlQE&lt;/videoflash&gt; <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Customizing Lookup Lists&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> # In SME, select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Lookup Lists&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> # Select the label name assocaited with the drop down list you need to edit.<br /> # On the right, you may see existing drop down values. Use the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons (shown below) at the bottom to add a new value, edit a value or delete a value.<br /> <br /> [[File:LookupLists_Add_Edit_Delete.jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt; **NOTE** &lt;/span&gt; The values in the drop down list sort alphabetically. If you want them to display in a specific order, type a number in front of the value as shown in the image below.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:LookupLists_Numbered(1).jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Delete a value in the Lookup List&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> # Click Edit in the Setup Module on the left.<br /> # Select the label name associated wtih the drop down you want to delete.<br /> # Select the value you want to delete.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039; at the bottom.<br /> # If there is a record in SME with the value selected you are about to delete, you will receive a warning. If you choose to delete the value anyway, any record that had that value selected will now be blank.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039; if you want to go forward deleting the value.<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Make a value in the Lookup List Inactive&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> Making a drop down value inactive will keep the value assigned to any existing record that has the value selected, but it won&#039;t be available in the drop down list for any new records that you create.<br /> <br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Setup Module on the left.<br /> # Select the label name associated with the drop down you want to edit.<br /> # Select the value you want to mark inactive.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Uncheck &#039;&#039;&#039;Is Active&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Setup Module on the left.<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Set the Default Order Status for new, closed or invoiced orders&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> 1. Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; &gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039; &gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Lists&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Order Statuses&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Lookup List<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Either edit an exiting status or click New to create a new one<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. If you want the status to default when you create a new order, check&#039;&#039;&#039; Default status on new orders&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you want to set a default when you close an order, go to the status or create a status and check &#039;&#039;&#039;Default status on closed orders&#039;&#039;&#039;. For the status you want to set as default when you invoice an order, go to the status or create the status and check &#039;&#039;&#039;Default status on invoiced orders&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:OrderStatusDefault.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;Note - If you reopen an order, the order status won&#039;t be updated.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;If you are using TechPortal and your techs are closing orders in the field, you can set a default status for closed orders such as &quot;field work complete&quot;. That way, when you search your closed orders, you can tell which orders were recently closed by technicians in the field.<br /> <br /> == Common Services ==<br /> Common Services provides a way for you to assign a key word to a block of text. When typing notes or filling out a work order, instead of typing the text you can select the key word you set up in Common Services.<br /> <br /> Below is a video to watch how to set up Common Services, or you can read the instructions below.<br /> <br /> &lt;videoflash&gt;lPOXN9trbLs&lt;/videoflash&gt;<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Setting up Common Services&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;When a Common Service is created, everyone on your team will see it. You may want to designate one person on your team to set up the Common Services so the list can stay organized.<br /> <br /> # In SME, click the Setup module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Common Services&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; in the menu on the left.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # In the window that opens, type a description for the Common Service. This is the name that will identify the block of text and it will display in the common service list. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # In the window that opens, type the block of text. Use the formatting tools at the top of the window to add bullets, numbering and to change the font color or size.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Common Services Setup Window (on the left).<br /> <br /> The Common Service is now created. Any user can now open up notes or create a work order, right click in the text window and select Common Services to use your template.<br /> <br /> == Notifications ==<br /> <br /> Notifications can be set for special customers. Special can either be good or bad. For example, set notifications on customers that are behind on their balance so that no additional service is performed until the pay past balances. Or set notifications on important customers that notify managers or other key personnel that new service is being performed for these VIP customers.<br /> <br /> First you will create the generic notification rules and message, and then you can assign the notification to your customers.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup notification:&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. In the Setup module, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Notifications&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Fill out the notification:<br /> <br /> [[File:NotifyTypes.jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039; – this is the notification template name.<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039; – select the module the action is taken in that prompts the notification (e.g. creating a service order would be service)<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; – select the action that will prompt the notification (e.g. creating a new service order would be “add”, closing a proposal would be “close”)<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Allow Alert User&#039;&#039;&#039; –an alert is a pop up window that will open when a user takes the action in the module setup in the notification. The message that pops up in the alert is setup by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Message&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Notify Types window.<br /> <br /> [[File:NotificationAlert.jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Allow Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – checking this will send an email to the address specified when adding the notification to a customer when a notification is prompted.<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Message&#039;&#039;&#039; – Click Message and enter the alert message that the user will see pop up when they trigger a notification. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;. <br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Assign notification to customers:&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Go to the customer record.<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Select the Notifications tab.<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. In the Customer Notifications window:<br /> <br /> [[File:AssignNotification.jpg]]<br /> <br /> * Notification Type – select the notification template you created in this drop down field<br /> * Send Email to – if you want an email to be send when the notification is triggered, check here and type the email address.<br /> * Alert User – check here if you want the pop up alert to show on the users screen when they trigger a notification.<br /> * Message – click here to edit the alert pop up message for this customer.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;5. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; and the notification is setup for the customer.<br /> <br /> == User Groups ==<br /> Each user group has permissions within SME. Assign users to a user group and the user will inherit the permissions assigned in the group. Examples of different user groups you can create are:<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;Admin Group - by default this group is created<br /> &lt;br&gt;Sales Group – this group may have rights to all modules except for receivables and only read access to the inventory module.<br /> &lt;br&gt;Full Rights Group – this group has access to all modules and all tabs and features within each module<br /> <br /> Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[User Groups]]&#039;&#039;&#039; to learn more.<br /> <br /> == Payments Gateway ==<br /> This section of the setup module is related to the Point of Sale application that works with SME.<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> [[File:PaymentsGateway.png]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Company&diff=5931 Company 2015-09-16T14:33:43Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>In the Setup module, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039; to setup user groups, customize lookup lists (drop down values), set customer defaults and more.<br /> <br /> &lt;u&gt;Setup Groups:&lt;/u&gt;<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Company Information&#039;&#039;&#039; – Upload you logo, select SME colors and set fiscal year starting date.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;System&#039;&#039;&#039; – Set password requirements, technician hours and other system settings.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – Set next order and invoice numbers, set default exporting to QuickBooks, set dispatch colors and various other order settings.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Customer Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039; – Set default values for customer records, create custom customer fields and decide how you want customer account numbers to be generated.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Lists&#039;&#039;&#039; – Customize the drop down values in fields throughout SME.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Common Services&#039;&#039;&#039; – Assign a key word to a block of text which you can enter into orders and notes throughout SME by selecting the keyword.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Notifications&#039;&#039;&#039; - Setup notification templates which you can assign to customers to alert user when taking action (e.g. alert user to not create an order for customer because they are past due or alert user when creating order that the customer is VIP) <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;User Groups&#039;&#039;&#039; - Each user needs to be assigned to a user group. The user group determines your user&#039;s permission to modules and features throughout SME. Setup user groups here. <br /> <br /> == Company Information ==<br /> In this section, you need to add your address and company contact information, upload a logo, select your fiscal year starting date and select SME colors.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Address Information:&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> The address entered here will display on reports such as service orders and invoices. Click Edit and enter your company address, phone, email and webpage. You might want your email address to be a generic address such as info@... Or sales@... <br /> <br /> [[File:CompanyInformation.jpg]<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Upload Logo&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> The logo you upload here will display on reports.<br /> <br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; (on the left).<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Logo Options&#039;&#039;&#039; and select &#039;&#039;&#039;Load&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Browse for your logo and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Open&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Company Colors&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> The Company Color you select will show as the main background color in SME. The Secondary color is the color that shows on various buttons (image below)<br /> <br /> [[File:Colors.jpg]]<br /> <br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Select Company Color&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # In the Color window, select color and click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> <br /> Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; and the color will change.<br /> <br /> <br /> == System ==<br /> <br /> The System Defaults section is where you will set password requirements, technician work hours for dispatch, and various settings and defaults described below.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:SystemDefaults_Part1.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;u&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Password Requirements&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/u&gt; (&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/span&gt; in image above)<br /> This is where you can require your users to use passwords to log in and set password length requirements. You set the passwords for your users in the [[Users]] section of the Setup module.<br /> &lt;br&gt;Password Expires after &#039;X&#039; days. Upon expiration the user is presented with a window to change their password.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: password cannot be longer than 8 characters. <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;u&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Technician Work Hours&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/u&gt;(&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/span&gt; in image above)<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Tech Hours Per Day&#039;&#039;&#039; - When you schedule a technician either in dispatch or using labor item, this is the number of hours that will be scheduled by default. You can increase or decrease hours.<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Start Time&#039;&#039;&#039; The Order Dispatch window will use the start time and hours to determine the hours you can schedule your techs.<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Dispatch Refresh in seconds&#039;&#039;&#039; - enter how frequently you want the dispatch window to refresh. Usually 0. <br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Dispatch Hours Per Day&#039;&#039;&#039; - Enter the number of hours you want to show on the dispatch calendar. (If &#039;&#039;&#039;Start Time&#039;&#039;&#039; is 7am, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Hours per Day&#039;&#039;&#039; is 10 hours, then dispatch calendar shows 7am - 5pm)<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;- &lt;u&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Scan Button and Command Line&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/u&gt;(&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;3&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/span&gt; in image above)<br /> &lt;br&gt;If you have a scanner that can accept a command line then you can set this up and within stored docs you can launch your scanner for scan or display. We have a customer that developed a product that works with the Scan Command Line in SME and provides full document storage and scanning. If you use this scanner then you can set it up and within stored docs you can launch your scanner for scan or display. We can put you in touch with them to purchase their scanner product. If you don&#039;t go with these solutions, you would need some other application that would communicate between SME and the scanners. <br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;u&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Additional System Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/u&gt; (&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;4&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;/span&gt; in image below)<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:SystemDefaults_Part2.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;Below is a description of each setting, however most of the settings in this section are self explanatory.<br /> &lt;br&gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Reset YTD totals at the start of fiscal year&#039;&#039;&#039; – YTD totals are found in the Customer Accounts tab, showing the customer totals year to date.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Hide data path in status bar&#039;&#039;&#039; – the status bar is at the bottom of SME.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Proposal Approval to Close or Convert to Order&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, proposals require approval before they can convert them to orders. If not approved yet, users will receive a message prompting approval.<br /> &lt;br&gt;When converting proposals:<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy services requested to services requested&#039;&#039;&#039; - services requested in proposal will copy to services requested on the order generated by the proposal.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Copy services requested to services performed&#039;&#039;&#039; - services requested in proposal will copy to services performed on the order generated by the proposal.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Show Site Address on Dispatch Page&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, the site address will show on the order scheduled on the Order Dispatch window.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Default the Customer Billing Address to the Site Address&#039;&#039;&#039; – If this is checked, the address you type in the site address tab will carry over to the billing address tab. This saves you from having to click “set from site” on the billing tab.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Default the Customer Mailing Address to the Site Address&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this is checked, the address you type in the site address tab will carry over to the mailing address tab. This saves you from having to click “set from site” on the mailing tab.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Calculate Commission Based on Profit&#039;&#039;&#039; – If this is checked, the salesperson’s commission will be calculated off the profit, not the total.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Limit Overview to Current/Fiscal Year&#039;&#039;&#039; – The overview is found by clicking [[File:OverviewButton.jpg]] in the main form elements tabs.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Allow Journal Edits&#039;&#039;&#039; - this is related to Journal Notes. Currently not functional.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Include blank zone for item selection&#039;&#039;&#039;- With this checked, if a work order has a zone, then stock would be available to reserve from in warehouses with no zone as well as matching zones.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Auto Notify on New Issues&#039;&#039;&#039; - <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Automatically backup data at ___time every day&#039;&#039;&#039; - A backup file will be created and saved in your SME User folder at the time specified<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of digits after the decimal point for currency&#039;&#039;&#039; – Windows now handles this through regional settings. Go to [[Decimal Spaces]] to see how to setup.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Random order numbers&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, order numbers will be generated randomly<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Max Activity Check __ Minutes&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;SLA Status Time Check __ Minutes&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Calculate finance charges when invoice is __ days past due&#039;&#039;&#039; - see [[Late Fees / Finance Charges]] page for more information<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Class Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, user cannot save customer record until the Class is selected.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;When entering payments, show subcontractor costs&#039;&#039;&#039; – If this option is checked, when a payment is received SME it will check all the orders and highlight any service items with subcontractors selected and show the cost.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Lock Salesperson&#039;&#039;&#039; – If checked, can&#039;t change salesperson on proposal<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;On Service items, base Subcontractor cost on item price&#039;&#039;&#039; – When adding a service item to an order, there is a percent markup field for the service and you can also select a subcontractor to perform the service. If this option is NOT check, the percent markup is multiplied by the service cost to get the price. If this box IS checked, the price is fixed and cost paid to subcontractor is based on a percentage off the price.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wait time ___ seconds&#039;&#039;&#039; - Waits x number of seconds after a record is posted to see if an activity pops. Should be 0<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Default Document Directory&#039;&#039;&#039; - The directory select here will always be the default directory selected when you go to add a stored document to a record. This eliminates the need to always browse to the correct folder where the files are saved that need to be added to the record.<br /> <br /> == Order ==<br /> <br /> The Order Defaults section in the Setup Module where you will set various defaults such as colors associated with orders, beginning order and invoice numbers, finance charge past due dates. <br /> <br /> When getting started with SME, you may want to set the next order numbers, proposal number or next PO number. If you previously used a number system, you can set SME to pick up where you left off here. <br /> <br /> The &#039;&#039;&#039;Next Invoice #&#039;&#039;&#039; will be populated from QuickBooks after your initial sync. View the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Invoice Numbers in SME and QuickBooks]]&#039;&#039;&#039; page for information on keeping the next invoice number in sync between SME &amp; QB. If you don&#039;t want QB to update the next invoice number in SME, you&#039;ll need to change the setting in SQLink showin on the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Invoice Numbers in SME and QuickBooks]]&#039;&#039;&#039; page. <br /> <br /> [[File:NextOrderNumbers.jpg]]<br /> <br /> # In SME, select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Order&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> # Fill out the next number in the section on the top left (circled in the image to the right)<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Default Export to QuickBooks Options&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> [[File:DefaultExportToQBSettings.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks, choose which SME forms export to QuickBooks by default. Click [[Default Export to QuickBooks Settings]] to learn how.<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Order Options&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:SetupCompanyOrderSettings.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t tax labor only orders&#039;&#039;&#039; - taxes won&#039;t be calculated if the only charge on an order is labor.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require at least one assigned tech to post an order&#039;&#039;&#039; - For invoices - can’t post without a labor record. For orders – can’t close the order without a labor record<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Automatically close fully invoiced orders&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, when you invoice an open order, SME will automatically close the order.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require order to be closed to invoice&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, you won&#039;t be able to invoice an open order. The order will have to be closed before invoicing.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Compliance Codes&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, when adding a labor item to an order you will be forced to select a compliance code if one isn&#039;t already on the order.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Require Service Codes&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, when adding a labor item to an order you will be forced to select a service code if one isn&#039;t already on the order.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Enforce Tech Compliance&#039;&#039;&#039; - If you need to use tech certification and compliance, please see [[Tech Compliance]] for more information<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Set To Be Printed flag on new invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; - For new invoices created, the to be printed flag will be checked. This is useful if you are using the batch print feature in SME. See [[Batch Print/Email Invoices]] for more info.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Set To Be Mailed flag on new invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; - For new invoices created, the to be emailed flag will be checked. If you are syncing invoices to QB, if there is no email address in the invoice, an error will occur on the sync, so if you are using this setting, make sure you have email addresses entered.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Last line message for invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; - the text typed here appears at the bottom of some invoice reports.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Apply Excise Tax&#039;&#039;&#039; -Enter the dollar range excise tax is applied to. You will need to also go to the customer record &gt; Rates tab and set the Excise Tax rate and check Calculate Excise tab for every customer that needs it applied. You can set a default excise rate for every new customer record created in the Customer defaults section of setup.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Calculate finance charge when invoice is __ days past due&#039;&#039;&#039; - Enter the number of days late you want SME to use to calculate finance charge.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Base past due on invoice date not due date&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Display customer overdue message&#039;&#039;&#039; - if a customer account has a Net 30, Net 60 or Net 90 amount greater than 0 (found on Customer record &gt; Account tab), when creating an order or invoice for that customer you will receive a pop up message. You can click OK and continue to create the record for them.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Auto publish dispatch changes&#039;&#039;&#039; - If you are using Field Scheduler, this option would automatically send out the meeting requests to techs when labor is scheduled. If not checked, you can click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Publish Changes&#039;&#039;&#039; button in dispatch to sent meeting requests to techs when you are ready.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Auto Deliver Allocated on Close&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this option checked, any material on an order with the Item Status of &#039;&#039;&#039;Allocated&#039;&#039;&#039; will be changed to &#039;&#039;&#039;Delivered&#039;&#039;&#039; when you close the order and stock will be depleted. This saves a step from having to manually reserve stock to deplete stock.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Ignore Labor Hours on Material&#039;&#039;&#039; - In an inventory item, you can set labor hours associated with the material. When adding material to an order, a labor item would open with the hours. Check this setting and you will not be prompted to schedule labor for material that has labor hours.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Filter Services on Labor&#039;&#039;&#039; - Limits the service item list in labor editor to those services included on that order.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Clear order settings on Clone&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, when you clone a service order, the following fields will be cleared: Reference #, Assigned To, PO#, Taken By, Service Code, Billing Status.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Include blank zone for item selection&#039;&#039;&#039; - When doing searches that involve zones, this setting allows items with no zone to still show in list when zone is defined for the search.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Update Order Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this is unchecked, the assigned to field on an order will populate with the technician on the first labor item added to the order. If this is checked, the assigned to field will update with every tech added in a labor item or when a tech is changed on the labor item.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;In the Order Dispatch window you can identify whether an order is open, closed, invoiced or past due by color. You can choose colors that make sense for your team.<br /> # Locate the &#039;&#039;&#039;Dispatch Colors for Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; section (image below)<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Open Orders&#039;&#039;&#039; and select the color from the color picker. Follow the same for closed, invoiced and past due orders.<br /> # Uncheck &#039;&#039;&#039;White Font&#039;&#039;&#039; to change the font to black.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> <br /> [[File:DispatchColors.jpg]]<br /> <br /> == Inventory ==<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory Address and Email&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:Setup_InventoryAddress.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Use Strict Inventory Control&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;With Use Strict Inventory Control checked, you cannot invoice an order with jit or allocated counts. Stock must be reserved for items before they can be invoiced.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:Setup_StrictInventoryControl.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Inventory SnapShot Settings&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;Set how frequently you want SME to take a snapshot of your inventory<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Take partial snapshot as used&#039;&#039;&#039; - every time an inventory item is used, the item SnapShot tab will be updated for the item. <br /> CAUTION: This option utilizes extensive resources to capture snapshot data for every transactional change of inventory. This option is not recommended for live system and instead should just be used in special circumstances such as testing.<br /> &lt;br&gt; - &#039;&#039;&#039;Take complete snapshot every X days&#039;&#039;&#039; - SME will update the SnapShot tab on all items based on the frequency set. The first person to login for the day that this triggers will launch a separate background process to save the snapshot data for all inventory.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:InventorySnapShotSettting.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;Go to the inventory item and click the SnapShot tab to see the snapshot entries made for the item (image below)<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:InventorySnapShotTabDetails.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Base COGS on Date of Invoice&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;This is a setting related to the General Ledger entries made in QuickBooks for material invoiced. If your inventory items are in both SME and QuickBooks, this has no impact for you. If you have SME to use [[GL Entries for SME Inventory]] then you would choose this option. See the &#039;&#039;&#039;[[GL Entries for SME Inventory]]&#039;&#039;&#039; page for more information.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:BaseCOGSOnDateOfInvoice.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Additional Inventory Setup Options&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:InventoryDefaults_Setup.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Include subcontractors for item vendors&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, vendors that are subcontractors will show in the vendor drop down in the Add Item to Order window. <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:Setup_INventory_INcludeSubsInVendorDropdown.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Force JIT&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, any inventory items created in SME will have &#039;&#039;&#039;Force JIT&#039;&#039;&#039; checked by default.<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t Update Cost when Receiving from PO&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, any inventory items created in SME will have &#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t Update cost when receiving from PO&#039;&#039;&#039; checked.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:InventoryDefaults.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Check Equipment for Duplicate Serial Numbers&#039;&#039;&#039; - If checked, when equipment record is added SME will autocheck other equipment records for duplicate serial number<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Don&#039;t Autoclose POs&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, when all items are received on a PO, the PO won&#039;t automatically close.<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Limit Items Vendors&#039;&#039;&#039; - With this checked, SME will limit the items on a PO to items listed for the vendor.<br /> <br /> == Customer Defaults ==<br /> <br /> In the Customer Defaults section you can set default values for the various customer fields and create custom fields for the customer record.<br /> <br /> Watch the video below or read the instructions below on setting the customer defaults.<br /> &lt;videoflash&gt;b20ssBbRSmA&lt;/videoflash&gt;<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;To set SME to generate account numbers for your customers<br /> # In SME, select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click Edit on the left.<br /> # Check &#039;&#039;&#039;Generate Account Number&#039;&#039;&#039; and fill out the &#039;&#039;&#039;Next Customer Account #&#039;&#039;&#039; field.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Account Defaults&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> You can set default values for certain fields in the customer record.<br /> <br /> # In SME, select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click Edit on the left.<br /> # On the &#039;&#039;&#039;Account Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, select the drop down value you want to populate the field automatically when a new customer record is created.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> <br /> &lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt; ** NOTE ** &lt;/span&gt; To add values to the drop down fields on the Account Defaults section, see the [[Lookup Lists]] tutorial.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Warn on Past Due&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this is checked, when you create a new customer, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add customer message on past due&#039;&#039;&#039; flag will be checked. With that checked, when the customer is past due the message field will populate with Account is Past Due on the Customer details tab. (image below)<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:AccountIsPastDue.png]]<br /> <br /> == Lookup Lists ==<br /> <br /> Throughout SME, there are drop down fields. You can customize the drop down lists using the Setup module as long as you have the permissions to do so set by your SME Administrator.<br /> <br /> Click [[SME Lookup Lists]] to read definitions of each of the items in Lookup Lists.&lt;br&gt;<br /> <br /> View the following video or follow the instructions below to customize your Lookup Lists in SME.<br /> &lt;videoflash&gt;IKmKGTeUlQE&lt;/videoflash&gt; <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Customizing Lookup Lists&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> # In SME, select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Lookup Lists&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; on the left.<br /> # Select the label name assocaited with the drop down list you need to edit.<br /> # On the right, you may see existing drop down values. Use the &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons (shown below) at the bottom to add a new value, edit a value or delete a value.<br /> <br /> [[File:LookupLists_Add_Edit_Delete.jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;color:orange&quot;&gt; **NOTE** &lt;/span&gt; The values in the drop down list sort alphabetically. If you want them to display in a specific order, type a number in front of the value as shown in the image below.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:LookupLists_Numbered(1).jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Delete a value in the Lookup List&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> # Click Edit in the Setup Module on the left.<br /> # Select the label name associated wtih the drop down you want to delete.<br /> # Select the value you want to delete.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039; at the bottom.<br /> # If there is a record in SME with the value selected you are about to delete, you will receive a warning. If you choose to delete the value anyway, any record that had that value selected will now be blank.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Yes&#039;&#039;&#039; if you want to go forward deleting the value.<br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Make a value in the Lookup List Inactive&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> Making a drop down value inactive will keep the value assigned to any existing record that has the value selected, but it won&#039;t be available in the drop down list for any new records that you create.<br /> <br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Setup Module on the left.<br /> # Select the label name associated with the drop down you want to edit.<br /> # Select the value you want to mark inactive.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Uncheck &#039;&#039;&#039;Is Active&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Setup Module on the left.<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;h3&gt;Set the Default Order Status for new, closed or invoiced orders&lt;/h3&gt;<br /> 1. Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup&#039;&#039;&#039; &gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039; &gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Lists&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Order Statuses&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Lookup List<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Either edit an exiting status or click New to create a new one<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. If you want the status to default when you create a new order, check&#039;&#039;&#039; Default status on new orders&#039;&#039;&#039;. If you want to set a default when you close an order, go to the status or create a status and check &#039;&#039;&#039;Default status on closed orders&#039;&#039;&#039;. For the status you want to set as default when you invoice an order, go to the status or create the status and check &#039;&#039;&#039;Default status on invoiced orders&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:OrderStatusDefault.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;Note - If you reopen an order, the order status won&#039;t be updated.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;If you are using TechPortal and your techs are closing orders in the field, you can set a default status for closed orders such as &quot;field work complete&quot;. That way, when you search your closed orders, you can tell which orders were recently closed by technicians in the field.<br /> <br /> == Common Services ==<br /> Common Services provides a way for you to assign a key word to a block of text. When typing notes or filling out a work order, instead of typing the text you can select the key word you set up in Common Services.<br /> <br /> Below is a video to watch how to set up Common Services, or you can read the instructions below.<br /> <br /> &lt;videoflash&gt;lPOXN9trbLs&lt;/videoflash&gt;<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Setting up Common Services&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;When a Common Service is created, everyone on your team will see it. You may want to designate one person on your team to set up the Common Services so the list can stay organized.<br /> <br /> # In SME, click the Setup module.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Company&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Common Services&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; in the menu on the left.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # In the window that opens, type a description for the Common Service. This is the name that will identify the block of text and it will display in the common service list. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # In the window that opens, type the block of text. Use the formatting tools at the top of the window to add bullets, numbering and to change the font color or size.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> # Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Common Services Setup Window (on the left).<br /> <br /> The Common Service is now created. Any user can now open up notes or create a work order, right click in the text window and select Common Services to use your template.<br /> <br /> == Notifications ==<br /> <br /> Notifications can be set for special customers. Special can either be good or bad. For example, set notifications on customers that are behind on their balance so that no additional service is performed until the pay past balances. Or set notifications on important customers that notify managers or other key personnel that new service is being performed for these VIP customers.<br /> <br /> First you will create the generic notification rules and message, and then you can assign the notification to your customers.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup notification:&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. In the Setup module, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Notifications&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Fill out the notification:<br /> <br /> [[File:NotifyTypes.jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039; – this is the notification template name.<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Module&#039;&#039;&#039; – select the module the action is taken in that prompts the notification (e.g. creating a service order would be service)<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; – select the action that will prompt the notification (e.g. creating a new service order would be “add”, closing a proposal would be “close”)<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Allow Alert User&#039;&#039;&#039; –an alert is a pop up window that will open when a user takes the action in the module setup in the notification. The message that pops up in the alert is setup by clicking &#039;&#039;&#039;Message&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Notify Types window.<br /> <br /> [[File:NotificationAlert.jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Allow Send Email&#039;&#039;&#039; – checking this will send an email to the address specified when adding the notification to a customer when a notification is prompted.<br /> &lt;br&gt;- &#039;&#039;&#039;Message&#039;&#039;&#039; – Click Message and enter the alert message that the user will see pop up when they trigger a notification. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;. <br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Assign notification to customers:&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Go to the customer record.<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Select the Notifications tab.<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. In the Customer Notifications window:<br /> <br /> [[File:AssignNotification.jpg]]<br /> <br /> * Notification Type – select the notification template you created in this drop down field<br /> * Send Email to – if you want an email to be send when the notification is triggered, check here and type the email address.<br /> * Alert User – check here if you want the pop up alert to show on the users screen when they trigger a notification.<br /> * Message – click here to edit the alert pop up message for this customer.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;5. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039; and the notification is setup for the customer.<br /> <br /> == User Groups ==<br /> Each user group has permissions within SME. Assign users to a user group and the user will inherit the permissions assigned in the group. Examples of different user groups you can create are:<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;Admin Group - by default this group is created<br /> &lt;br&gt;Sales Group – this group may have rights to all modules except for receivables and only read access to the inventory module.<br /> &lt;br&gt;Full Rights Group – this group has access to all modules and all tabs and features within each module<br /> <br /> Click &#039;&#039;&#039;[[User Groups]]&#039;&#039;&#039; to learn more.<br /> <br /> == Payments Gateway ==<br /> This section of the setup module is related to the Point of Sale application that works with SME.<br /> &lt;br&gt;<br /> [[File:PaymentsGateway.png]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_8.1_-_Revision_History&diff=5889 SME 8.1 - Revision History 2015-07-08T21:19:58Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>&#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 07/01/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.71&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Move Tax logic back to the executable due to SQL issues merging the data<br /> *Utilities/Fixed/Running inventory recreate details<br /> *PO/Fixed/Items not getting set as received when received<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/30/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.71&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Not hiding commission info on totals tab<br /> *PO/Modified/Do not recalculate PO counts if nothing received<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/29/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.70\SQLink 8.1.5.23&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Vendors/Modified/Do not export if the vendor is an SME only vendor<br /> *SQLink/Added/Parent Vendor only import/export<br /> *SQLink/Added/Export only Parent Vendors if the option is set<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/23/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.69&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Tax group name causing error when editing or creating new records<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Could not edit labor when invoiced count equaled zero<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/19/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.68/SQLink 8.1.4.22&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/PO not exporting correctly when Customer name not in QB<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Selecting stock after it has been set to JIT or Allocated<br /> *Setup/Fixed/User Setup not restricting editing when not allowed<br /> *Reports/Modified/Now limiting query when opening a report to edit<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Include blank Zones in dropdowns<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Query when selecting options<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/OK button error when no record was selected<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/11/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.67 - Not released&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/06/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.66&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Could not edit text lines<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Customer was dropped when exporting a PO created from orders<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/05/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.65&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Next Date prompt was locked on requesting a next date when it was already set<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/Set the next date from the order generation, if available, next date, or current date<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/When saving line item set the next generation if the order is in edit/insert mode<br /> *System/Modified/Show taxes on inventory &amp; service items if SME is in Canadian mode<br /> *System/Modified/Use the tax code on the items from labor/services/inventory<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Double Click on order in grid jumps to the correct order<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Package items were not getting set as on PO<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/04/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.64&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Taxes/Add ability to set item tax on the items<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Add the item tax when adding the item to an order regardless of any other tax setting<br /> *System/Utilities/Added feature to Clone the database<br /> *Customer/Fixed/Editing customer equipment maintenance activities in Windows 8/server 2012<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/03/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.63&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation now has closed flag for physical count batches<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Reconciliation dates getting set on items that were loaded in the batch but not adjusted<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation - close all batches before creating a new batch<br /> *Inventory/Added/Inventory Reconciliation history table<br /> *Inventory/Added/Ability to reconcile by individual item or by batch<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/03/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.62&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Items not getting set as received if the items were in a package<br /> *Orders/Added/Site Notes to Notes menu<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/More fixes on Stock tab/Add Stock editor<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/28/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.61/SQLink 8.1.4.21&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Material editor error editing material<br /> *Customer Equipment/Fixed/Error adding equipment from the Customer Equipment module<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Item Editor Vendor Item search not loading<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Customer Equipment PO Status was not updating when an item was placed on a PO<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Item tab order number filled in wrong when the PO was created from a cloned order<br /> *Orders/Added/Site Notes to Notes menu<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/More fixes on Stock tab/Add Stock editor<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Invoices were exporting to QB with all items as non-tax due to changes in Canadian logic<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/27/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.60/SQLink 8.1.4.20&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Taxes/When calculating taxes do not round line items only round the Total to match QuickBooks.<br /> *System/Discounts/Set up Order level discounts on line item taxes (order must have a tax group or code).<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Stock Add form was calling the incorrect form.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Taxing to depend on the line item, not the inventory item.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Flagging taxable as false on records with float values for the field type.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Tax details sometimes filtered out when calculating Canadian item taxes.<br /> *System/Tax/Over rounding on tax line items.<br /> *System/Fixed/Taxes discounts in QuickBooks Canadian only apply to items with &#039;matching&#039; tax codes - i.e. if you have 3 items with HST, one item with P, and the item discount has &#039;HST&#039; code (and is applied before taxes), SME will only apply to the three HST items.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Flag to not update contacts between SME and QB. If Checked contacts will not import/export.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Flag to not set SME prefix.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Use PO Reference Number to SQLink options.<br /> *SQLink/Added/PO Items Not Billable to options. If set status on items will be Billable.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Tech Code, 360, to set the merge date on all fields so all info is not synced after a QuickBooks upgrade/update<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/18/2015/ Version: 8.1.2.59 - Limited Released/SQLink 8.1.3.19&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Setup/Taxes - set up SME to work in Canadian versions without QB<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/12/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.58/8.1.3.17&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Don&#039;t export reverse credits (auto generated in payments from invoices with negative balances)<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/08/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.58/8.1.3.16&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/When doing a resynch, don&#039;t flag overpayments and balancing payment for export<br /> *SQLink/Added/When exporting invoices using summarized totals, separate the negatives from the positive amounts, and flag negative amounts as non-taxable<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Returning error &#039;invoice not found&#039; when invoice billing company was different than payment billing company<br /> *SQLink/Added/Help function - given an invoice number, return all invoice IDs found in QB, and all invoice IDs found in SME for that number<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/05/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.57/8.1.3.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Payments/Modified/Added new parameter for online payments<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/28/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.56&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Forms no longer open in Edit mode unless something is actually changing on the form<br /> *Customer/Fixed/Error adding Prepaid hours<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Misspelling on form<br /> *Orders/Fixed/When converting set the &#039;Is Partial&#039; flag on the order task records<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Set the &#039;Is Fixed&#039; flag after calculating with the partial billable hours. This will allow the changing of Billable hours for tracking without affecting the order total<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Order task records with the &#039;Is Partial&#039; flag set will not implement changes<br /> *PO/Fixed/Error when receiving allocated items on an order<br /> *Payments/Modified/Will now accept a partial payment<br /> *Incoming Email/Modified/Now use phone number or email to parse out which company the incoming email is to generate a ticket for<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/23/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.55/SQLink 8.1.3.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Contacts/Modified/When adding new contacts, IF there is no customer UID set on the record, set the customer UID to the order UID. <br /> *Contacts/Modified/Tech Code to set Customer UID to Order UID on contacts with blank customer UID<br /> *System/Snapshot/Widen total fields due to issue when converting from old versions of SMP<br /> *Contacts/Added/Tech Code to update phones from contacts if the phone is on the contact but not the master table<br /> *Orders/Modified/Delete from Contacts if the Customer UID = Order UID<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/20/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.54/SQLink 8.1.3.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Reconciliation/Added Grouping to the editor grid<br /> *Inventory/Reconciliation/Added order number when item getting modified is on an order<br /> *SQLink/Postsynch/Set flags based on date and if exported &#039;When possible&#039; (Not possible for tech time and subcontractor)<br /> *SQLink/GL/Fixed formatting on GL export Total Amount<br /> *SQLink/Auto Logging/Save the log to a file when records exceed 5k. (Usually only happens on an initial import)<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/17.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.53&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation set up to utilize the batch id for tracking<br /> *Contacts/Modified/When canceling an order/invoice/proposal - Remove contacts added when a new customer record has been started in a module other than the customer module<br /> *System/Added/Tech code to clear out all contacts without a customer UID<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Order task records were not always updating when changed<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Item Editor was not always applying the Force JIT option when it was set<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.52&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation functionality testing<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.51/SQLink 8.1.3.13 &#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added color for items that are on PO / New Functionality<br /> *System/Setup/Added PO Received order status / New Functionality<br /> *System/Modified/User Group Override Labor cost functionality / New Functionality<br /> *Customer/Added/Default Order Status for Open &amp; Closed / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/PO Order Status setting / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Service Code default status / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/PO status logic - if set will notify user when all records are received / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Fill in Service Code from customer, if blank use order / New Functionality<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Text not showing on drop downs due to Font Color / New Functionality<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Color on popup to lighter color / New Functionality<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.25.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.50&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Updates/Change was dropping the DB permissions and was not able to reconnect them while building<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.24.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.49&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Not released<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.19.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.48&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Proposal/Fixed/Copy-Paste not working in Services Requested<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Labor editor not updating when using Bill Status of Equal Scheduled<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Bad field name error when cloning recurring orders<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Refresh added to view since dispatch was returning Record not found on some orders due to not refreshing the view<br /> *Proposal/Fixed/Dot Net error when changing Billing status on task records<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Error when manually generating a recurring order<br /> *System/Modified/Removed POS customers that were created for Point of Sale app which is no longer used<br /> *Recurring/Modified/Option to not generate outgoing emails when orders are entered from the customer portal - New Functionality<br /> *System/Modified/Stop allowing typing if text goes beyond the field length. Match to Customer Portal/Tech Portal<br /> *Setup/Added/Fonts now a system setting - New Functionality<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Transfer fixed so last line is now updated and re-editing is not necessary<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.10.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.47&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Added/Batch info to the order, ID, Batch Date - New Functionality<br /> *Invoice/Added/Create Recurring order form an invoice<br /> *Orders/Added/Create a Recurring order from an order<br /> *Setup/Added/Recurring Order settings as customer defaults - New Functionality<br /> *Invoice/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Orders/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Proposals/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Batch Print/Modified/Now includes Batch Date in the Batch ID dropdown<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/When copying to recurring order, do not copy package breakout items. packages change over time, so their items are not included on recurring orders<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/Can now add packages<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.46/SQLink 8.1.3.12&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Moved change notification from the grid to the table since drop downs were not filling in correctly<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Invalid function error when adding a valid tech to an order<br /> *SQLink/Added/Date range for re-export of data<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.05.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.45/SQLink 8.1.3.11&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Do not prompt for re-export if nothing changed on PO when saving<br /> *SQLink/Modified/For Canadian companies fill item tax info since items are used to set tax status<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Error when deleting a subtotal from Order Items screen<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.04.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.44&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/F10 Search for open PO&#039;s<br /> *System/Added/Tools&gt; Advanced&gt; Set default font on memo fields - New functionality<br /> *Invoice/Fixed/Adding items to an itemized invoice causing errors<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.02.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.43&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Added/To Be emailed and To Be Printed to Details and Settings tab<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.42/8.1.3.10&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Views/Modified/Filters always case sensitive<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Do not export employee info from SME if Tech Time unchecked <br /> *SQLink/Added/Resync date so user can select how far back in SME history to go <br /> *SQLink/Modified/All open invoices will be exported, only payments tied to invoices will be exported, only PO&#039;s with received items will be exported<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.25.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.41/8.1.3.8&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Payments/Added/Refund payment transaction info<br /> *Payments/Added/Added payment methods for online refunds<br /> *Payments/Added/Never allow export of refunded online payments<br /> *SQLink/Added/Pull in tax/Non Tax if not already pulled in<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Bad field name on tax logic<br /> *System/Fixed/Errors when converting custom tables from older versions<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.17.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.40&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch Print/Modified/Added drop down for batch printing orders<br /> *Batch Print/Added/Batch ID to grid batch printing orders<br /> *Batch Print/Added/Column customization to grid<br /> *Orders/Modified/Proposal/Order/Project triggers to only total if something changed<br /> *Payments/Added/Refund payment logic<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.39&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Recurring Order/Fixed/Invoice drop down not filling<br /> *Orders/Added/Settings to maintain recurring batch order information<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.14.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.38&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Setup/Credit Card Processing/Allow editing of settings<br /> *System/Batch ID&#039;s/Added &#039;last&#039; batch run to tables<br /> *System/Tables/Added Is Clone if originated from a cloned record<br /> *Recurring Order/Added/Convert as invoice and bypass order<br /> *System/Added/setting for running batches on Recurring orders, recurring invoices, scheduled services<br /> *Customer/Added/If the customer is inactive clear credit card info<br /> *Orders-PO&#039;s/Added/Do not send emails until cloning is finished <br /> *System/Added/setting for running batches on Recurring orders, recurring invoices, scheduled services<br /> *System/Added/Auto generate recurring invoices/orders/services - New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Added : If the user is flagged to do the batch processes, (Preferences), check to see if the system flag has been set for batch (i.e. user flagged to do periodic maintenance, recurring settings have PM setup as &#039;include in batch). If set, use the batch processing for generation. This will be needed unless/until the site schedules jobs to do the batch processing instead. Batches now run the generation without interrupting SME processing.<br /> *System/Modified/Don&#039;t generate activity unless there is a record count<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.10.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.37&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Customer/Added/Customer/Store Credit Card grid<br /> *Setup/Added/Setup/Company/System/Enable Pay Pro flag<br /> *Invoice/Added/Pay Online option<br /> *Payments/Added/Pay Online option<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Do not override Cost/Price in the item editor when selecting stock<br /> *System/Modified/If a user is Inactive turn off the Logged In Flag<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.36&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Order tax handling <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.04.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.35/SQLink 8.1.2.7&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/DYN Export/Break out export files by month<br /> *System/Added/Table to store Credit card info per customer<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Added clear QB ID on PO tables<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Now matches existing wage item if it exists in SME<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.03.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.34&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/DYN Export/All exported invoices go out as &#039;in&#039;<br /> *System/Updates/Only rebuild indexes on tables with a modified structure<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.30.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.33/SQLink 8.1.2.6&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to stop importing vendors from QB and only export from SME to QB<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to clear all QB UID&#039;s and other imported QB info to allow SME to sync with a new QB Company file<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Only use the QB UID for searching in QB for an existing item on a re-sync<br /> *PO/Fixed/Bad field name in a PO export query<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.32/SQLink 8.1.1.5&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Added a tech code to turn off SQLink if a customer decided to stop using QB<br /> *System/DYN Export/Show QB ID flag<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Export of Partner Discounts to always be a positive number<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.21.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.31&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Data not getting set correctly if editing after closing the PO<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Creating multiple material detail records when : the cost had changed AND the item was not serialized AND the available quantity &lt; the po Item quantity (which resulted in a split condition)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.30&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Work Groups to the Assigned To lists for selection<br /> *System/Added/If the Assigned To is a Work Group set all new tasks for the Work Group<br /> *System/Added/Work Group editor added email field<br /> *Orders/Added/Work Group query for reporting<br /> *Orders/Added/Salesperson to Order Status table<br /> *Orders/Added/Work Group logic on item editor<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Check Work Group emails for Auto Outgoing emails<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Added salesperson to Auto Outgoing emails<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Work Group to task emails. If work group exists and has non blank email, use that email, otherwise, use tech&#039;s/vendor&#039;s email<br /> *Routines/Fixed/Misspelling of salesperson causing emails to stop going out<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.15.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.29&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Orders/Modified/Items can now be imported from Excel to fill purchase orders<br /> *System/Modified/No longer reports an error if license check fails<br /> *System/Modified/Grid speed issues <br /> *System/Modified/Set options on new databases<br /> *System/Modified/Hide Web Reports Option unless Web Reports are enabled on the database<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Right Click menu item &#039;Email Ticket&#039; now calls same form as the orders modules<br /> *System/Added/Option to disable multi-threading on grids for Windows 8 and server 2012<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.12.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.28&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Menu item to toggle all print flags if some are set they will clear and the others will set<br /> *RMA/Modified/When receiving RMA Item, if the permanent removal is not checked, always treat it as if the &#039;replace item&#039; were.<br /> *Orders/Modified/Some orders were never going to 100% invoiced due to item deletion and addition after initial invoice<br /> *System/Conversion/Triggers not correctly set when converting from versions prior to 8.0<br /> *System/Auto Email/Custom fields that match between modules were not getting filled in on automatically generated orders<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.09.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.27&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Editor on Material Detail tab was not filling information correctly<br /> *System/Conversion/Corrected auto run tech code<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.08.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.26&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Add to Company Equipment flag dropped when adding them to an order<br /> *System/Modified/Dynamics data export<br /> *System/Fixed/Message when logging into a database other than the default in multi database systems<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.07.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.25&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Further disabling of grid sorting<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Tax formatting was three places<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.24&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Limit license check to 2 tries before defaulting to temporary status<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.05.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.23&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Dataset not on edit mode<br /> *System/Modified/Temporary disabling of grids calling multiple table queries to fill the results<br /> *System/Added/Excel export to .xlsx extensions<br /> *System/Fixed/Data file path for the Grid Excel export option<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.18.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.22&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Modified/Material Editor/Location now read when the item is selected to avoid warehouse issues<br /> *System/Modified/Class now carries from Service Items through all modules to invoices<br /> *System/Modified/Maintenance Contract numbers now carry through in the ref# field to invoices generated from recurring invoices <br /> *Orders/Modified/Material Editor/Changing the warehouse on an item that was using a different warehouse no longer auto transfers the stock to the newly selected location<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.17.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.21&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Dynamics data export<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Labor Editor had an infinite loop when changing billable amount. Only happened when it was not associated with a scheduled amount change<br /> *System/Modified/Maintenance/Warranty Expiration/Now checks that minimum dates are set since if they are not SME could generate false records<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.17.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.20&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Auto Email/Fixed/Subject line character restrictions for special characters<br /> *System/Export/Modified Dynamics export<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.16.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.19&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Update now pulls from 8.1 update FTP folders<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.15.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.18&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Issue with Contract Number on editor<br /> *System/Fixed/Form Code not pulling in custom tab when form code is used<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Only reduce counts if they are greater than the received count<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.12.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.17/SQLink 8.1.1.3&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Journal entries not displaying on entering the tab<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.10.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.16/SQLink 8.1.1.2&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/PO Account ID in Link options<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to ignore the customer when only Billing Customers are stored in QuickBooks<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.08.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Export for Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.08.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Export for Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.06.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Export method for text export to MS Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.05.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.13&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/HTML text editor update to fix pasting images into SME<br /> *System/Fixed/Conversion when database names do not match SQL conventions<br /> *System/Modified/Error log messages<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.03.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.12&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/incorrect field name in vendor items query<br /> *System/Modified/Locking of data in SQL <br /> *System/Modified/Reduced attempts to write locked data from 10 tries to 5 in SQL <br /> *Orders/Service Items/Fixed/Issue when writing Class Name on Recurring generation<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.02.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.11&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Contacts/Filter by both Site and Billing<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Adding item to PO that was created from an order would fill in the order number<br /> *Maintenance Contracts/Fixed/Updating maintenance contract was resetting the Recurring Invoice start date<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.01.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.10&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Users/Fixed/Code value updates with user name changes<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Moved more processes to tables as opposed to temp tables<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Grid issue when selecting multiple items from the Partial Invoice screen was causing SME to crash<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Assets moved from temp table to permanent table<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Voided orders no longer show in Dispatch<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.24.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.9&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Tech Code/Runs tech code to revert all failed order conversions<br /> *SQLink/Updated/Now updated to SME 8.1<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.19.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.8&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Fields and tables for dynamic export<br /> *System/Added/Logic to fill the dynamic tables<br /> *Packages/Fixed/Error calculating package item totals when price is generated<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.18.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.7&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Error scrolling records when no options are set on settings tab<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Error when scrolling through combined invoices on the Service/Install tabs<br /> *Batch PO/Fixed/Trigger not getting re-initialized when updating<br /> *Recurring Invoices/Fixed/Error when posting Recurring Invoices.<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.12.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.6&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Batch PO/Added Item Number to grid<br /> *System/Modified/Orders/Made Require Service Code an option <br /> *System/Modified/Order/Added Allocated warning when adding orders to combined invoices<br /> *System/Modified/Order handling from SME Mobile was causing occasional duplicate order UID&#039;s<br /> *System/Fixed/Error logging and record update time/out issues<br /> *System/Fixed/Saving records under Customer Equipment was not writing info to the new table but placing them in the old table<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.11.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.5&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Fixed/Edit function in grid stopped working<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.7.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.4&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Activities/Fixed/Alarms returning way too many records after database rebuild<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.6.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.3&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Orders/History tabs not saving settings and displaying correctly<br /> *Proposals/Fixed/Fixed rates tab not calculating <br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Transfers not completing the last record on multiple record transfers<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.4.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.2&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Add/Zone filter to Proposal/Orders/Invoices to prevent &#039;Cannot add to order when adding from Dispatch&#039;<br /> *System/Add/Use Dispatch view for lookups when adding to dispatch. In some cases you may not see a refresh if you are on service and drag a proposal to dispatch<br /> *System/Fixed/Error when adding new records. UID was initialized in the incorrect place. Causing prompts for SLA &amp; Class re-initialization <br /> *System/Modified/Tech certification check only if there are labor task records<br /> *System/Updated/to latest component sets on all grids/dispatch controls/reporting controls/and data controls<br /> *System/Fixed/Batch PO/Filters not functioning as planned<br /> *System/Fixed/Error message on shutting down SME<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 10.31.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.1&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Added/Button to only close modified PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Added/Button for full regenerate of all PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Fill table now only fills required PO&#039;s instead of all PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Grid settings to improve speed<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Only add missing records to the grid instead of completely reloading the grid<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 10.30.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.1&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Dispatch id&#039;s to tech, vendor, service, install, proposal, invoice<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Uses temp table for labor, uses view data vs query and updates ( Now the ID&#039;s necessary for dispatch are on the tables)<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Tracked and fixed &#039;missing&#039; field errors when adding labor from project<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Creates view for labor and orders<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Modified/Added button to only close GENERATED records<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Added button for FULL regenerate<br /> *Purchase Order Bulk Import/Modified/Fill table now only generates REQUIRED records, vs all 5000 records<br /> *Purchase Order Bulk Import/Modified/Required records defined as &#039;close all records that have been generated or have a defined minimum level.<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Fixed/Grid settings to speedup process<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Modified/Only &#039;missing&#039; records are regenerated.</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_8.1_-_Revision_History&diff=5888 SME 8.1 - Revision History 2015-07-08T21:18:22Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>&#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /07/01/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.71&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Move Tax logic back to the executable due to SQL issues merging the data<br /> *Utilities/Fixed/Running inventory recreate details<br /> *PO/Fixed/Items not getting set as received when received<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /06/30/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.71&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Not hiding commission info on totals tab<br /> *PO/Modified/Do not recalculate PO counts if nothing received<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /06/29/2015/ Version: 8.1.5.70\SQLink 8.1.5.23&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Vendors/Modified/Do not export if the vendor is an SME only vendor<br /> *SQLink/Added/Parent Vendor only import/export<br /> *SQLink/Added/Export only Parent Vendors if the option is set<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /06/23/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.69&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Tax group name causing error when editing or creating new records<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Could not edit labor when invoiced count equaled zero<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /06/19/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.68/SQLink 8.1.4.22&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/PO not exporting correctly when Customer name not in QB<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Selecting stock after it has been set to JIT or Allocated<br /> *Setup/Fixed/User Setup not restricting editing when not allowed<br /> *Reports/Modified/Now limiting query when opening a report to edit<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Include blank Zones in dropdowns<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Query when selecting options<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/OK button error when no record was selected<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /06/11/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.67 - Not released&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /06/06/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.66&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Could not edit text lines<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Customer was dropped when exporting a PO created from orders<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /06/05/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.65&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Next Date prompt was locked on requesting a next date when it was already set<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/Set the next date from the order generation, if available, next date, or current date<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/When saving line item set the next generation if the order is in edit/insert mode<br /> *System/Modified/Show taxes on inventory &amp; service items if SME is in Canadian mode<br /> *System/Modified/Use the tax code on the items from labor/services/inventory<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Double Click on order in grid jumps to the correct order<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Package items were not getting set as on PO<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /06/04/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.64&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Taxes/Add ability to set item tax on the items<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Add the item tax when adding the item to an order regardless of any other tax setting<br /> *System/Utilities/Added feature to Clone the database<br /> *Customer/Fixed/Editing customer equipment maintenance activities in Windows 8/server 2012<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/03/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.63&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation now has closed flag for physical count batches<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Reconciliation dates getting set on items that were loaded in the batch but not adjusted<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation - close all batches before creating a new batch<br /> *Inventory/Added/Inventory Reconciliation history table<br /> *Inventory/Added/Ability to reconcile by individual item or by batch<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/03/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.62&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Items not getting set as received if the items were in a package<br /> *Orders/Added/Site Notes to Notes menu<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/More fixes on Stock tab/Add Stock editor<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/28/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.61/SQLink 8.1.4.21&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Material editor error editing material<br /> *Customer Equipment/Fixed/Error adding equipment from the Customer Equipment module<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Item Editor Vendor Item search not loading<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Customer Equipment PO Status was not updating when an item was placed on a PO<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Item tab order number filled in wrong when the PO was created from a cloned order<br /> *Orders/Added/Site Notes to Notes menu<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/More fixes on Stock tab/Add Stock editor<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Invoices were exporting to QB with all items as non-tax due to changes in Canadian logic<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/27/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.60/SQLink 8.1.4.20&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Taxes/When calculating taxes do not round line items only round the Total to match QuickBooks.<br /> *System/Discounts/Set up Order level discounts on line item taxes (order must have a tax group or code).<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Stock Add form was calling the incorrect form.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Taxing to depend on the line item, not the inventory item.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Flagging taxable as false on records with float values for the field type.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Tax details sometimes filtered out when calculating Canadian item taxes.<br /> *System/Tax/Over rounding on tax line items.<br /> *System/Fixed/Taxes discounts in QuickBooks Canadian only apply to items with &#039;matching&#039; tax codes - i.e. if you have 3 items with HST, one item with P, and the item discount has &#039;HST&#039; code (and is applied before taxes), SME will only apply to the three HST items.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Flag to not update contacts between SME and QB. If Checked contacts will not import/export.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Flag to not set SME prefix.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Use PO Reference Number to SQLink options.<br /> *SQLink/Added/PO Items Not Billable to options. If set status on items will be Billable.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Tech Code, 360, to set the merge date on all fields so all info is not synced after a QuickBooks upgrade/update<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/18/2015/ Version: 8.1.2.59 - Limited Released/SQLink 8.1.3.19&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Setup/Taxes - set up SME to work in Canadian versions without QB<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/12/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.58/8.1.3.17&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Don&#039;t export reverse credits (auto generated in payments from invoices with negative balances)<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/08/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.58/8.1.3.16&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/When doing a resynch, don&#039;t flag overpayments and balancing payment for export<br /> *SQLink/Added/When exporting invoices using summarized totals, separate the negatives from the positive amounts, and flag negative amounts as non-taxable<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Returning error &#039;invoice not found&#039; when invoice billing company was different than payment billing company<br /> *SQLink/Added/Help function - given an invoice number, return all invoice IDs found in QB, and all invoice IDs found in SME for that number<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/05/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.57/8.1.3.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Payments/Modified/Added new parameter for online payments<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/28/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.56&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Forms no longer open in Edit mode unless something is actually changing on the form<br /> *Customer/Fixed/Error adding Prepaid hours<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Misspelling on form<br /> *Orders/Fixed/When converting set the &#039;Is Partial&#039; flag on the order task records<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Set the &#039;Is Fixed&#039; flag after calculating with the partial billable hours. This will allow the changing of Billable hours for tracking without affecting the order total<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Order task records with the &#039;Is Partial&#039; flag set will not implement changes<br /> *PO/Fixed/Error when receiving allocated items on an order<br /> *Payments/Modified/Will now accept a partial payment<br /> *Incoming Email/Modified/Now use phone number or email to parse out which company the incoming email is to generate a ticket for<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/23/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.55/SQLink 8.1.3.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Contacts/Modified/When adding new contacts, IF there is no customer UID set on the record, set the customer UID to the order UID. <br /> *Contacts/Modified/Tech Code to set Customer UID to Order UID on contacts with blank customer UID<br /> *System/Snapshot/Widen total fields due to issue when converting from old versions of SMP<br /> *Contacts/Added/Tech Code to update phones from contacts if the phone is on the contact but not the master table<br /> *Orders/Modified/Delete from Contacts if the Customer UID = Order UID<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/20/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.54/SQLink 8.1.3.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Reconciliation/Added Grouping to the editor grid<br /> *Inventory/Reconciliation/Added order number when item getting modified is on an order<br /> *SQLink/Postsynch/Set flags based on date and if exported &#039;When possible&#039; (Not possible for tech time and subcontractor)<br /> *SQLink/GL/Fixed formatting on GL export Total Amount<br /> *SQLink/Auto Logging/Save the log to a file when records exceed 5k. (Usually only happens on an initial import)<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/17.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.53&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation set up to utilize the batch id for tracking<br /> *Contacts/Modified/When canceling an order/invoice/proposal - Remove contacts added when a new customer record has been started in a module other than the customer module<br /> *System/Added/Tech code to clear out all contacts without a customer UID<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Order task records were not always updating when changed<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Item Editor was not always applying the Force JIT option when it was set<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.52&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation functionality testing<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.51/SQLink 8.1.3.13 &#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added color for items that are on PO / New Functionality<br /> *System/Setup/Added PO Received order status / New Functionality<br /> *System/Modified/User Group Override Labor cost functionality / New Functionality<br /> *Customer/Added/Default Order Status for Open &amp; Closed / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/PO Order Status setting / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Service Code default status / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/PO status logic - if set will notify user when all records are received / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Fill in Service Code from customer, if blank use order / New Functionality<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Text not showing on drop downs due to Font Color / New Functionality<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Color on popup to lighter color / New Functionality<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.25.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.50&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Updates/Change was dropping the DB permissions and was not able to reconnect them while building<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.24.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.49&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Not released<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.19.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.48&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Proposal/Fixed/Copy-Paste not working in Services Requested<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Labor editor not updating when using Bill Status of Equal Scheduled<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Bad field name error when cloning recurring orders<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Refresh added to view since dispatch was returning Record not found on some orders due to not refreshing the view<br /> *Proposal/Fixed/Dot Net error when changing Billing status on task records<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Error when manually generating a recurring order<br /> *System/Modified/Removed POS customers that were created for Point of Sale app which is no longer used<br /> *Recurring/Modified/Option to not generate outgoing emails when orders are entered from the customer portal - New Functionality<br /> *System/Modified/Stop allowing typing if text goes beyond the field length. Match to Customer Portal/Tech Portal<br /> *Setup/Added/Fonts now a system setting - New Functionality<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Transfer fixed so last line is now updated and re-editing is not necessary<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.10.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.47&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Added/Batch info to the order, ID, Batch Date - New Functionality<br /> *Invoice/Added/Create Recurring order form an invoice<br /> *Orders/Added/Create a Recurring order from an order<br /> *Setup/Added/Recurring Order settings as customer defaults - New Functionality<br /> *Invoice/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Orders/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Proposals/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Batch Print/Modified/Now includes Batch Date in the Batch ID dropdown<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/When copying to recurring order, do not copy package breakout items. packages change over time, so their items are not included on recurring orders<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/Can now add packages<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.46/SQLink 8.1.3.12&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Moved change notification from the grid to the table since drop downs were not filling in correctly<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Invalid function error when adding a valid tech to an order<br /> *SQLink/Added/Date range for re-export of data<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.05.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.45/SQLink 8.1.3.11&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Do not prompt for re-export if nothing changed on PO when saving<br /> *SQLink/Modified/For Canadian companies fill item tax info since items are used to set tax status<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Error when deleting a subtotal from Order Items screen<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.04.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.44&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/F10 Search for open PO&#039;s<br /> *System/Added/Tools&gt; Advanced&gt; Set default font on memo fields - New functionality<br /> *Invoice/Fixed/Adding items to an itemized invoice causing errors<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.02.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.43&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Added/To Be emailed and To Be Printed to Details and Settings tab<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.42/8.1.3.10&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Views/Modified/Filters always case sensitive<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Do not export employee info from SME if Tech Time unchecked <br /> *SQLink/Added/Resync date so user can select how far back in SME history to go <br /> *SQLink/Modified/All open invoices will be exported, only payments tied to invoices will be exported, only PO&#039;s with received items will be exported<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.25.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.41/8.1.3.8&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Payments/Added/Refund payment transaction info<br /> *Payments/Added/Added payment methods for online refunds<br /> *Payments/Added/Never allow export of refunded online payments<br /> *SQLink/Added/Pull in tax/Non Tax if not already pulled in<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Bad field name on tax logic<br /> *System/Fixed/Errors when converting custom tables from older versions<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.17.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.40&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch Print/Modified/Added drop down for batch printing orders<br /> *Batch Print/Added/Batch ID to grid batch printing orders<br /> *Batch Print/Added/Column customization to grid<br /> *Orders/Modified/Proposal/Order/Project triggers to only total if something changed<br /> *Payments/Added/Refund payment logic<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.39&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Recurring Order/Fixed/Invoice drop down not filling<br /> *Orders/Added/Settings to maintain recurring batch order information<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.14.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.38&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Setup/Credit Card Processing/Allow editing of settings<br /> *System/Batch ID&#039;s/Added &#039;last&#039; batch run to tables<br /> *System/Tables/Added Is Clone if originated from a cloned record<br /> *Recurring Order/Added/Convert as invoice and bypass order<br /> *System/Added/setting for running batches on Recurring orders, recurring invoices, scheduled services<br /> *Customer/Added/If the customer is inactive clear credit card info<br /> *Orders-PO&#039;s/Added/Do not send emails until cloning is finished <br /> *System/Added/setting for running batches on Recurring orders, recurring invoices, scheduled services<br /> *System/Added/Auto generate recurring invoices/orders/services - New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Added : If the user is flagged to do the batch processes, (Preferences), check to see if the system flag has been set for batch (i.e. user flagged to do periodic maintenance, recurring settings have PM setup as &#039;include in batch). If set, use the batch processing for generation. This will be needed unless/until the site schedules jobs to do the batch processing instead. Batches now run the generation without interrupting SME processing.<br /> *System/Modified/Don&#039;t generate activity unless there is a record count<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.10.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.37&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Customer/Added/Customer/Store Credit Card grid<br /> *Setup/Added/Setup/Company/System/Enable Pay Pro flag<br /> *Invoice/Added/Pay Online option<br /> *Payments/Added/Pay Online option<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Do not override Cost/Price in the item editor when selecting stock<br /> *System/Modified/If a user is Inactive turn off the Logged In Flag<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.36&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Order tax handling <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.04.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.35/SQLink 8.1.2.7&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/DYN Export/Break out export files by month<br /> *System/Added/Table to store Credit card info per customer<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Added clear QB ID on PO tables<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Now matches existing wage item if it exists in SME<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.03.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.34&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/DYN Export/All exported invoices go out as &#039;in&#039;<br /> *System/Updates/Only rebuild indexes on tables with a modified structure<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.30.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.33/SQLink 8.1.2.6&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to stop importing vendors from QB and only export from SME to QB<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to clear all QB UID&#039;s and other imported QB info to allow SME to sync with a new QB Company file<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Only use the QB UID for searching in QB for an existing item on a re-sync<br /> *PO/Fixed/Bad field name in a PO export query<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.32/SQLink 8.1.1.5&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Added a tech code to turn off SQLink if a customer decided to stop using QB<br /> *System/DYN Export/Show QB ID flag<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Export of Partner Discounts to always be a positive number<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.21.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.31&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Data not getting set correctly if editing after closing the PO<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Creating multiple material detail records when : the cost had changed AND the item was not serialized AND the available quantity &lt; the po Item quantity (which resulted in a split condition)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.30&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Work Groups to the Assigned To lists for selection<br /> *System/Added/If the Assigned To is a Work Group set all new tasks for the Work Group<br /> *System/Added/Work Group editor added email field<br /> *Orders/Added/Work Group query for reporting<br /> *Orders/Added/Salesperson to Order Status table<br /> *Orders/Added/Work Group logic on item editor<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Check Work Group emails for Auto Outgoing emails<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Added salesperson to Auto Outgoing emails<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Work Group to task emails. If work group exists and has non blank email, use that email, otherwise, use tech&#039;s/vendor&#039;s email<br /> *Routines/Fixed/Misspelling of salesperson causing emails to stop going out<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.15.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.29&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Orders/Modified/Items can now be imported from Excel to fill purchase orders<br /> *System/Modified/No longer reports an error if license check fails<br /> *System/Modified/Grid speed issues <br /> *System/Modified/Set options on new databases<br /> *System/Modified/Hide Web Reports Option unless Web Reports are enabled on the database<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Right Click menu item &#039;Email Ticket&#039; now calls same form as the orders modules<br /> *System/Added/Option to disable multi-threading on grids for Windows 8 and server 2012<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.12.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.28&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Menu item to toggle all print flags if some are set they will clear and the others will set<br /> *RMA/Modified/When receiving RMA Item, if the permanent removal is not checked, always treat it as if the &#039;replace item&#039; were.<br /> *Orders/Modified/Some orders were never going to 100% invoiced due to item deletion and addition after initial invoice<br /> *System/Conversion/Triggers not correctly set when converting from versions prior to 8.0<br /> *System/Auto Email/Custom fields that match between modules were not getting filled in on automatically generated orders<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.09.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.27&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Editor on Material Detail tab was not filling information correctly<br /> *System/Conversion/Corrected auto run tech code<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.08.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.26&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Add to Company Equipment flag dropped when adding them to an order<br /> *System/Modified/Dynamics data export<br /> *System/Fixed/Message when logging into a database other than the default in multi database systems<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.07.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.25&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Further disabling of grid sorting<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Tax formatting was three places<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.24&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Limit license check to 2 tries before defaulting to temporary status<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.05.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.23&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Dataset not on edit mode<br /> *System/Modified/Temporary disabling of grids calling multiple table queries to fill the results<br /> *System/Added/Excel export to .xlsx extensions<br /> *System/Fixed/Data file path for the Grid Excel export option<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.18.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.22&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Modified/Material Editor/Location now read when the item is selected to avoid warehouse issues<br /> *System/Modified/Class now carries from Service Items through all modules to invoices<br /> *System/Modified/Maintenance Contract numbers now carry through in the ref# field to invoices generated from recurring invoices <br /> *Orders/Modified/Material Editor/Changing the warehouse on an item that was using a different warehouse no longer auto transfers the stock to the newly selected location<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.17.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.21&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Dynamics data export<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Labor Editor had an infinite loop when changing billable amount. Only happened when it was not associated with a scheduled amount change<br /> *System/Modified/Maintenance/Warranty Expiration/Now checks that minimum dates are set since if they are not SME could generate false records<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.17.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.20&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Auto Email/Fixed/Subject line character restrictions for special characters<br /> *System/Export/Modified Dynamics export<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.16.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.19&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Update now pulls from 8.1 update FTP folders<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.15.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.18&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Issue with Contract Number on editor<br /> *System/Fixed/Form Code not pulling in custom tab when form code is used<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Only reduce counts if they are greater than the received count<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.12.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.17/SQLink 8.1.1.3&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Journal entries not displaying on entering the tab<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.10.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.16/SQLink 8.1.1.2&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/PO Account ID in Link options<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to ignore the customer when only Billing Customers are stored in QuickBooks<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.08.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Export for Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.08.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Export for Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.06.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Export method for text export to MS Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.05.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.13&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/HTML text editor update to fix pasting images into SME<br /> *System/Fixed/Conversion when database names do not match SQL conventions<br /> *System/Modified/Error log messages<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.03.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.12&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/incorrect field name in vendor items query<br /> *System/Modified/Locking of data in SQL <br /> *System/Modified/Reduced attempts to write locked data from 10 tries to 5 in SQL <br /> *Orders/Service Items/Fixed/Issue when writing Class Name on Recurring generation<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.02.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.11&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Contacts/Filter by both Site and Billing<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Adding item to PO that was created from an order would fill in the order number<br /> *Maintenance Contracts/Fixed/Updating maintenance contract was resetting the Recurring Invoice start date<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.01.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.10&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Users/Fixed/Code value updates with user name changes<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Moved more processes to tables as opposed to temp tables<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Grid issue when selecting multiple items from the Partial Invoice screen was causing SME to crash<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Assets moved from temp table to permanent table<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Voided orders no longer show in Dispatch<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.24.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.9&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Tech Code/Runs tech code to revert all failed order conversions<br /> *SQLink/Updated/Now updated to SME 8.1<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.19.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.8&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Fields and tables for dynamic export<br /> *System/Added/Logic to fill the dynamic tables<br /> *Packages/Fixed/Error calculating package item totals when price is generated<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.18.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.7&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Error scrolling records when no options are set on settings tab<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Error when scrolling through combined invoices on the Service/Install tabs<br /> *Batch PO/Fixed/Trigger not getting re-initialized when updating<br /> *Recurring Invoices/Fixed/Error when posting Recurring Invoices.<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.12.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.6&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Batch PO/Added Item Number to grid<br /> *System/Modified/Orders/Made Require Service Code an option <br /> *System/Modified/Order/Added Allocated warning when adding orders to combined invoices<br /> *System/Modified/Order handling from SME Mobile was causing occasional duplicate order UID&#039;s<br /> *System/Fixed/Error logging and record update time/out issues<br /> *System/Fixed/Saving records under Customer Equipment was not writing info to the new table but placing them in the old table<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.11.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.5&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Fixed/Edit function in grid stopped working<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.7.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.4&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Activities/Fixed/Alarms returning way too many records after database rebuild<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.6.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.3&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Orders/History tabs not saving settings and displaying correctly<br /> *Proposals/Fixed/Fixed rates tab not calculating <br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Transfers not completing the last record on multiple record transfers<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.4.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.2&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Add/Zone filter to Proposal/Orders/Invoices to prevent &#039;Cannot add to order when adding from Dispatch&#039;<br /> *System/Add/Use Dispatch view for lookups when adding to dispatch. In some cases you may not see a refresh if you are on service and drag a proposal to dispatch<br /> *System/Fixed/Error when adding new records. UID was initialized in the incorrect place. Causing prompts for SLA &amp; Class re-initialization <br /> *System/Modified/Tech certification check only if there are labor task records<br /> *System/Updated/to latest component sets on all grids/dispatch controls/reporting controls/and data controls<br /> *System/Fixed/Batch PO/Filters not functioning as planned<br /> *System/Fixed/Error message on shutting down SME<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 10.31.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.1&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Added/Button to only close modified PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Added/Button for full regenerate of all PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Fill table now only fills required PO&#039;s instead of all PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Grid settings to improve speed<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Only add missing records to the grid instead of completely reloading the grid<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 10.30.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.1&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Dispatch id&#039;s to tech, vendor, service, install, proposal, invoice<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Uses temp table for labor, uses view data vs query and updates ( Now the ID&#039;s necessary for dispatch are on the tables)<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Tracked and fixed &#039;missing&#039; field errors when adding labor from project<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Creates view for labor and orders<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Modified/Added button to only close GENERATED records<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Added button for FULL regenerate<br /> *Purchase Order Bulk Import/Modified/Fill table now only generates REQUIRED records, vs all 5000 records<br /> *Purchase Order Bulk Import/Modified/Required records defined as &#039;close all records that have been generated or have a defined minimum level.<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Fixed/Grid settings to speedup process<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Modified/Only &#039;missing&#039; records are regenerated.</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_8.1_-_Revision_History&diff=5886 SME 8.1 - Revision History 2015-06-18T14:39:52Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>&#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /06/06/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.66&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Could not edit text lines<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Customer was dropped when exporting a PO created from orders<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /06/05/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.65&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Next Date prompt was locked on requesting a next date when it was already set<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/Set the next date from the order generation, if available, next date, or current date<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/When saving line item set the next generation if the order is in edit/insert mode<br /> *System/Modified/Show taxes on inventory &amp; service items if SME is in Canadian mode<br /> *System/Modified/Use the tax code on the items from labor/services/inventory<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Double Click on order in grid jumps to the correct order<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Package items were not getting set as on PO<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /06/04/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.64&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Taxes/Add ability to set item tax on the items<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Add the item tax when adding the item to an order regardless of any other tax setting<br /> *System/Utilities/Added feature to Clone the database<br /> *Customer/Fixed/Editing customer equipment maintenance activities in Windows 8/server 2012<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/03/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.63&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation now has closed flag for physical count batches<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Reconciliation dates getting set on items that were loaded in the batch but not adjusted<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation - close all batches before creating a new batch<br /> *Inventory/Added/Inventory Reconciliation history table<br /> *Inventory/Added/Ability to reconcile by individual item or by batch<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/03/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.62&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Items not getting set as received if the items were in a package<br /> *Orders/Added/Site Notes to Notes menu<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/More fixes on Stock tab/Add Stock editor<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/28/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.61/SQLink 8.1.4.21&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Material editor error editing material<br /> *Customer Equipment/Fixed/Error adding equipment from the Customer Equipment module<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Item Editor Vendor Item search not loading<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Customer Equipment PO Status was not updating when an item was placed on a PO<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Item tab order number filled in wrong when the PO was created from a cloned order<br /> *Orders/Added/Site Notes to Notes menu<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/More fixes on Stock tab/Add Stock editor<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Invoices were exporting to QB with all items as non-tax due to changes in Canadian logic<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/27/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.60/SQLink 8.1.4.20&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Taxes/When calculating taxes do not round line items only round the Total to match QuickBooks.<br /> *System/Discounts/Set up Order level discounts on line item taxes (order must have a tax group or code).<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Stock Add form was calling the incorrect form.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Taxing to depend on the line item, not the inventory item.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Flagging taxable as false on records with float values for the field type.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Tax details sometimes filtered out when calculating Canadian item taxes.<br /> *System/Tax/Over rounding on tax line items.<br /> *System/Fixed/Taxes discounts in QuickBooks Canadian only apply to items with &#039;matching&#039; tax codes - i.e. if you have 3 items with HST, one item with P, and the item discount has &#039;HST&#039; code (and is applied before taxes), SME will only apply to the three HST items.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Flag to not update contacts between SME and QB. If Checked contacts will not import/export.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Flag to not set SME prefix.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Use PO Reference Number to SQLink options.<br /> *SQLink/Added/PO Items Not Billable to options. If set status on items will be Billable.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Tech Code, 360, to set the merge date on all fields so all info is not synced after a QuickBooks upgrade/update<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/18/2015/ Version: 8.1.2.59 - Limited Released/SQLink 8.1.3.19&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Setup/Taxes - set up SME to work in Canadian versions without QB<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/12/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.58/8.1.3.17&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Don&#039;t export reverse credits (auto generated in payments from invoices with negative balances)<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/08/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.58/8.1.3.16&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/When doing a resynch, don&#039;t flag overpayments and balancing payment for export<br /> *SQLink/Added/When exporting invoices using summarized totals, separate the negatives from the positive amounts, and flag negative amounts as non-taxable<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Returning error &#039;invoice not found&#039; when invoice billing company was different than payment billing company<br /> *SQLink/Added/Help function - given an invoice number, return all invoice IDs found in QB, and all invoice IDs found in SME for that number<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/05/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.57/8.1.3.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Payments/Modified/Added new parameter for online payments<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/28/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.56&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Forms no longer open in Edit mode unless something is actually changing on the form<br /> *Customer/Fixed/Error adding Prepaid hours<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Misspelling on form<br /> *Orders/Fixed/When converting set the &#039;Is Partial&#039; flag on the order task records<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Set the &#039;Is Fixed&#039; flag after calculating with the partial billable hours. This will allow the changing of Billable hours for tracking without affecting the order total<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Order task records with the &#039;Is Partial&#039; flag set will not implement changes<br /> *PO/Fixed/Error when receiving allocated items on an order<br /> *Payments/Modified/Will now accept a partial payment<br /> *Incoming Email/Modified/Now use phone number or email to parse out which company the incoming email is to generate a ticket for<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/23/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.55/SQLink 8.1.3.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Contacts/Modified/When adding new contacts, IF there is no customer UID set on the record, set the customer UID to the order UID. <br /> *Contacts/Modified/Tech Code to set Customer UID to Order UID on contacts with blank customer UID<br /> *System/Snapshot/Widen total fields due to issue when converting from old versions of SMP<br /> *Contacts/Added/Tech Code to update phones from contacts if the phone is on the contact but not the master table<br /> *Orders/Modified/Delete from Contacts if the Customer UID = Order UID<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/20/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.54/SQLink 8.1.3.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Reconciliation/Added Grouping to the editor grid<br /> *Inventory/Reconciliation/Added order number when item getting modified is on an order<br /> *SQLink/Postsynch/Set flags based on date and if exported &#039;When possible&#039; (Not possible for tech time and subcontractor)<br /> *SQLink/GL/Fixed formatting on GL export Total Amount<br /> *SQLink/Auto Logging/Save the log to a file when records exceed 5k. (Usually only happens on an initial import)<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/17.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.53&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation set up to utilize the batch id for tracking<br /> *Contacts/Modified/When canceling an order/invoice/proposal - Remove contacts added when a new customer record has been started in a module other than the customer module<br /> *System/Added/Tech code to clear out all contacts without a customer UID<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Order task records were not always updating when changed<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Item Editor was not always applying the Force JIT option when it was set<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.52&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation functionality testing<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.51/SQLink 8.1.3.13 &#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added color for items that are on PO / New Functionality<br /> *System/Setup/Added PO Received order status / New Functionality<br /> *System/Modified/User Group Override Labor cost functionality / New Functionality<br /> *Customer/Added/Default Order Status for Open &amp; Closed / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/PO Order Status setting / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Service Code default status / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/PO status logic - if set will notify user when all records are received / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Fill in Service Code from customer, if blank use order / New Functionality<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Text not showing on drop downs due to Font Color / New Functionality<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Color on popup to lighter color / New Functionality<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.25.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.50&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Updates/Change was dropping the DB permissions and was not able to reconnect them while building<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.24.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.49&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Not released<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.19.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.48&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Proposal/Fixed/Copy-Paste not working in Services Requested<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Labor editor not updating when using Bill Status of Equal Scheduled<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Bad field name error when cloning recurring orders<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Refresh added to view since dispatch was returning Record not found on some orders due to not refreshing the view<br /> *Proposal/Fixed/Dot Net error when changing Billing status on task records<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Error when manually generating a recurring order<br /> *System/Modified/Removed POS customers that were created for Point of Sale app which is no longer used<br /> *Recurring/Modified/Option to not generate outgoing emails when orders are entered from the customer portal - New Functionality<br /> *System/Modified/Stop allowing typing if text goes beyond the field length. Match to Customer Portal/Tech Portal<br /> *Setup/Added/Fonts now a system setting - New Functionality<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Transfer fixed so last line is now updated and re-editing is not necessary<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.10.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.47&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Added/Batch info to the order, ID, Batch Date - New Functionality<br /> *Invoice/Added/Create Recurring order form an invoice<br /> *Orders/Added/Create a Recurring order from an order<br /> *Setup/Added/Recurring Order settings as customer defaults - New Functionality<br /> *Invoice/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Orders/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Proposals/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Batch Print/Modified/Now includes Batch Date in the Batch ID dropdown<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/When copying to recurring order, do not copy package breakout items. packages change over time, so their items are not included on recurring orders<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/Can now add packages<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.46/SQLink 8.1.3.12&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Moved change notification from the grid to the table since drop downs were not filling in correctly<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Invalid function error when adding a valid tech to an order<br /> *SQLink/Added/Date range for re-export of data<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.05.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.45/SQLink 8.1.3.11&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Do not prompt for re-export if nothing changed on PO when saving<br /> *SQLink/Modified/For Canadian companies fill item tax info since items are used to set tax status<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Error when deleting a subtotal from Order Items screen<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.04.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.44&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/F10 Search for open PO&#039;s<br /> *System/Added/Tools&gt; Advanced&gt; Set default font on memo fields - New functionality<br /> *Invoice/Fixed/Adding items to an itemized invoice causing errors<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.02.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.43&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Added/To Be emailed and To Be Printed to Details and Settings tab<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.42/8.1.3.10&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Views/Modified/Filters always case sensitive<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Do not export employee info from SME if Tech Time unchecked <br /> *SQLink/Added/Resync date so user can select how far back in SME history to go <br /> *SQLink/Modified/All open invoices will be exported, only payments tied to invoices will be exported, only PO&#039;s with received items will be exported<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.25.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.41/8.1.3.8&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Payments/Added/Refund payment transaction info<br /> *Payments/Added/Added payment methods for online refunds<br /> *Payments/Added/Never allow export of refunded online payments<br /> *SQLink/Added/Pull in tax/Non Tax if not already pulled in<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Bad field name on tax logic<br /> *System/Fixed/Errors when converting custom tables from older versions<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.17.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.40&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch Print/Modified/Added drop down for batch printing orders<br /> *Batch Print/Added/Batch ID to grid batch printing orders<br /> *Batch Print/Added/Column customization to grid<br /> *Orders/Modified/Proposal/Order/Project triggers to only total if something changed<br /> *Payments/Added/Refund payment logic<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.39&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Recurring Order/Fixed/Invoice drop down not filling<br /> *Orders/Added/Settings to maintain recurring batch order information<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.14.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.38&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Setup/Credit Card Processing/Allow editing of settings<br /> *System/Batch ID&#039;s/Added &#039;last&#039; batch run to tables<br /> *System/Tables/Added Is Clone if originated from a cloned record<br /> *Recurring Order/Added/Convert as invoice and bypass order<br /> *System/Added/setting for running batches on Recurring orders, recurring invoices, scheduled services<br /> *Customer/Added/If the customer is inactive clear credit card info<br /> *Orders-PO&#039;s/Added/Do not send emails until cloning is finished <br /> *System/Added/setting for running batches on Recurring orders, recurring invoices, scheduled services<br /> *System/Added/Auto generate recurring invoices/orders/services - New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Added : If the user is flagged to do the batch processes, (Preferences), check to see if the system flag has been set for batch (i.e. user flagged to do periodic maintenance, recurring settings have PM setup as &#039;include in batch). If set, use the batch processing for generation. This will be needed unless/until the site schedules jobs to do the batch processing instead. Batches now run the generation without interrupting SME processing.<br /> *System/Modified/Don&#039;t generate activity unless there is a record count<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.10.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.37&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Customer/Added/Customer/Store Credit Card grid<br /> *Setup/Added/Setup/Company/System/Enable Pay Pro flag<br /> *Invoice/Added/Pay Online option<br /> *Payments/Added/Pay Online option<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Do not override Cost/Price in the item editor when selecting stock<br /> *System/Modified/If a user is Inactive turn off the Logged In Flag<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.36&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Order tax handling <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.04.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.35/SQLink 8.1.2.7&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/DYN Export/Break out export files by month<br /> *System/Added/Table to store Credit card info per customer<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Added clear QB ID on PO tables<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Now matches existing wage item if it exists in SME<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.03.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.34&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/DYN Export/All exported invoices go out as &#039;in&#039;<br /> *System/Updates/Only rebuild indexes on tables with a modified structure<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.30.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.33/SQLink 8.1.2.6&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to stop importing vendors from QB and only export from SME to QB<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to clear all QB UID&#039;s and other imported QB info to allow SME to sync with a new QB Company file<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Only use the QB UID for searching in QB for an existing item on a re-sync<br /> *PO/Fixed/Bad field name in a PO export query<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.32/SQLink 8.1.1.5&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Added a tech code to turn off SQLink if a customer decided to stop using QB<br /> *System/DYN Export/Show QB ID flag<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Export of Partner Discounts to always be a positive number<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.21.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.31&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Data not getting set correctly if editing after closing the PO<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Creating multiple material detail records when : the cost had changed AND the item was not serialized AND the available quantity &lt; the po Item quantity (which resulted in a split condition)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.30&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Work Groups to the Assigned To lists for selection<br /> *System/Added/If the Assigned To is a Work Group set all new tasks for the Work Group<br /> *System/Added/Work Group editor added email field<br /> *Orders/Added/Work Group query for reporting<br /> *Orders/Added/Salesperson to Order Status table<br /> *Orders/Added/Work Group logic on item editor<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Check Work Group emails for Auto Outgoing emails<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Added salesperson to Auto Outgoing emails<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Work Group to task emails. If work group exists and has non blank email, use that email, otherwise, use tech&#039;s/vendor&#039;s email<br /> *Routines/Fixed/Misspelling of salesperson causing emails to stop going out<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.15.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.29&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Orders/Modified/Items can now be imported from Excel to fill purchase orders<br /> *System/Modified/No longer reports an error if license check fails<br /> *System/Modified/Grid speed issues <br /> *System/Modified/Set options on new databases<br /> *System/Modified/Hide Web Reports Option unless Web Reports are enabled on the database<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Right Click menu item &#039;Email Ticket&#039; now calls same form as the orders modules<br /> *System/Added/Option to disable multi-threading on grids for Windows 8 and server 2012<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.12.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.28&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Menu item to toggle all print flags if some are set they will clear and the others will set<br /> *RMA/Modified/When receiving RMA Item, if the permanent removal is not checked, always treat it as if the &#039;replace item&#039; were.<br /> *Orders/Modified/Some orders were never going to 100% invoiced due to item deletion and addition after initial invoice<br /> *System/Conversion/Triggers not correctly set when converting from versions prior to 8.0<br /> *System/Auto Email/Custom fields that match between modules were not getting filled in on automatically generated orders<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.09.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.27&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Editor on Material Detail tab was not filling information correctly<br /> *System/Conversion/Corrected auto run tech code<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.08.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.26&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Add to Company Equipment flag dropped when adding them to an order<br /> *System/Modified/Dynamics data export<br /> *System/Fixed/Message when logging into a database other than the default in multi database systems<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.07.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.25&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Further disabling of grid sorting<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Tax formatting was three places<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.24&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Limit license check to 2 tries before defaulting to temporary status<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.05.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.23&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Dataset not on edit mode<br /> *System/Modified/Temporary disabling of grids calling multiple table queries to fill the results<br /> *System/Added/Excel export to .xlsx extensions<br /> *System/Fixed/Data file path for the Grid Excel export option<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.18.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.22&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Modified/Material Editor/Location now read when the item is selected to avoid warehouse issues<br /> *System/Modified/Class now carries from Service Items through all modules to invoices<br /> *System/Modified/Maintenance Contract numbers now carry through in the ref# field to invoices generated from recurring invoices <br /> *Orders/Modified/Material Editor/Changing the warehouse on an item that was using a different warehouse no longer auto transfers the stock to the newly selected location<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.17.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.21&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Dynamics data export<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Labor Editor had an infinite loop when changing billable amount. Only happened when it was not associated with a scheduled amount change<br /> *System/Modified/Maintenance/Warranty Expiration/Now checks that minimum dates are set since if they are not SME could generate false records<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.17.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.20&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Auto Email/Fixed/Subject line character restrictions for special characters<br /> *System/Export/Modified Dynamics export<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.16.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.19&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Update now pulls from 8.1 update FTP folders<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.15.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.18&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Issue with Contract Number on editor<br /> *System/Fixed/Form Code not pulling in custom tab when form code is used<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Only reduce counts if they are greater than the received count<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.12.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.17/SQLink 8.1.1.3&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Journal entries not displaying on entering the tab<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.10.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.16/SQLink 8.1.1.2&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/PO Account ID in Link options<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to ignore the customer when only Billing Customers are stored in QuickBooks<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.08.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Export for Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.08.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Export for Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.06.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Export method for text export to MS Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.05.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.13&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/HTML text editor update to fix pasting images into SME<br /> *System/Fixed/Conversion when database names do not match SQL conventions<br /> *System/Modified/Error log messages<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.03.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.12&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/incorrect field name in vendor items query<br /> *System/Modified/Locking of data in SQL <br /> *System/Modified/Reduced attempts to write locked data from 10 tries to 5 in SQL <br /> *Orders/Service Items/Fixed/Issue when writing Class Name on Recurring generation<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.02.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.11&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Contacts/Filter by both Site and Billing<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Adding item to PO that was created from an order would fill in the order number<br /> *Maintenance Contracts/Fixed/Updating maintenance contract was resetting the Recurring Invoice start date<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.01.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.10&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Users/Fixed/Code value updates with user name changes<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Moved more processes to tables as opposed to temp tables<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Grid issue when selecting multiple items from the Partial Invoice screen was causing SME to crash<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Assets moved from temp table to permanent table<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Voided orders no longer show in Dispatch<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.24.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.9&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Tech Code/Runs tech code to revert all failed order conversions<br /> *SQLink/Updated/Now updated to SME 8.1<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.19.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.8&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Fields and tables for dynamic export<br /> *System/Added/Logic to fill the dynamic tables<br /> *Packages/Fixed/Error calculating package item totals when price is generated<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.18.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.7&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Error scrolling records when no options are set on settings tab<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Error when scrolling through combined invoices on the Service/Install tabs<br /> *Batch PO/Fixed/Trigger not getting re-initialized when updating<br /> *Recurring Invoices/Fixed/Error when posting Recurring Invoices.<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.12.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.6&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Batch PO/Added Item Number to grid<br /> *System/Modified/Orders/Made Require Service Code an option <br /> *System/Modified/Order/Added Allocated warning when adding orders to combined invoices<br /> *System/Modified/Order handling from SME Mobile was causing occasional duplicate order UID&#039;s<br /> *System/Fixed/Error logging and record update time/out issues<br /> *System/Fixed/Saving records under Customer Equipment was not writing info to the new table but placing them in the old table<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.11.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.5&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Fixed/Edit function in grid stopped working<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.7.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.4&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Activities/Fixed/Alarms returning way too many records after database rebuild<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.6.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.3&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Orders/History tabs not saving settings and displaying correctly<br /> *Proposals/Fixed/Fixed rates tab not calculating <br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Transfers not completing the last record on multiple record transfers<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.4.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.2&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Add/Zone filter to Proposal/Orders/Invoices to prevent &#039;Cannot add to order when adding from Dispatch&#039;<br /> *System/Add/Use Dispatch view for lookups when adding to dispatch. In some cases you may not see a refresh if you are on service and drag a proposal to dispatch<br /> *System/Fixed/Error when adding new records. UID was initialized in the incorrect place. Causing prompts for SLA &amp; Class re-initialization <br /> *System/Modified/Tech certification check only if there are labor task records<br /> *System/Updated/to latest component sets on all grids/dispatch controls/reporting controls/and data controls<br /> *System/Fixed/Batch PO/Filters not functioning as planned<br /> *System/Fixed/Error message on shutting down SME<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 10.31.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.1&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Added/Button to only close modified PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Added/Button for full regenerate of all PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Fill table now only fills required PO&#039;s instead of all PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Grid settings to improve speed<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Only add missing records to the grid instead of completely reloading the grid<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 10.30.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.1&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Dispatch id&#039;s to tech, vendor, service, install, proposal, invoice<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Uses temp table for labor, uses view data vs query and updates ( Now the ID&#039;s necessary for dispatch are on the tables)<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Tracked and fixed &#039;missing&#039; field errors when adding labor from project<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Creates view for labor and orders<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Modified/Added button to only close GENERATED records<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Added button for FULL regenerate<br /> *Purchase Order Bulk Import/Modified/Fill table now only generates REQUIRED records, vs all 5000 records<br /> *Purchase Order Bulk Import/Modified/Required records defined as &#039;close all records that have been generated or have a defined minimum level.<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Fixed/Grid settings to speedup process<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Modified/Only &#039;missing&#039; records are regenerated.</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_8.1_-_Revision_History&diff=5885 SME 8.1 - Revision History 2015-06-10T15:34:54Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>&#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/03/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.63&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation now has closed flag for physical count batches<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Reconciliation dates getting set on items that were loaded in the batch but not adjusted<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation - close all batches before creating a new batch<br /> *Inventory/Added/Inventory Reconciliation history table<br /> *Inventory/Added/Ability to reconcile by individual item or by batch<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 06/03/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.62&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Items not getting set as received if the items were in a package<br /> *Orders/Added/Site Notes to Notes menu<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/More fixes on Stock tab/Add Stock editor<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/28/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.61/SQLink 8.1.4.21&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Material editor error editing material<br /> *Customer Equipment/Fixed/Error adding equipment from the Customer Equipment module<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Item Editor Vendor Item search not loading<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Customer Equipment PO Status was not updating when an item was placed on a PO<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Item tab order number filled in wrong when the PO was created from a cloned order<br /> *Orders/Added/Site Notes to Notes menu<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/More fixes on Stock tab/Add Stock editor<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Invoices were exporting to QB with all items as non-tax due to changes in Canadian logic<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/27/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.60/SQLink 8.1.4.20&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Taxes/When calculating taxes do not round line items only round the Total to match QuickBooks.<br /> *System/Discounts/Set up Order level discounts on line item taxes (order must have a tax group or code).<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Stock Add form was calling the incorrect form.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Taxing to depend on the line item, not the inventory item.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Flagging taxable as false on records with float values for the field type.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Tax details sometimes filtered out when calculating Canadian item taxes.<br /> *System/Tax/Over rounding on tax line items.<br /> *System/Fixed/Taxes discounts in QuickBooks Canadian only apply to items with &#039;matching&#039; tax codes - i.e. if you have 3 items with HST, one item with P, and the item discount has &#039;HST&#039; code (and is applied before taxes), SME will only apply to the three HST items.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Flag to not update contacts between SME and QB. If Checked contacts will not import/export.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Flag to not set SME prefix.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Use PO Reference Number to SQLink options.<br /> *SQLink/Added/PO Items Not Billable to options. If set status on items will be Billable.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Tech Code, 360, to set the merge date on all fields so all info is not synced after a QuickBooks upgrade/update<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/18/2015/ Version: 8.1.2.59 - Limited Released/SQLink 8.1.3.19&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Setup/Taxes - set up SME to work in Canadian versions without QB<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/12/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.58/8.1.3.17&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Don&#039;t export reverse credits (auto generated in payments from invoices with negative balances)<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/08/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.58/8.1.3.16&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/When doing a resynch, don&#039;t flag overpayments and balancing payment for export<br /> *SQLink/Added/When exporting invoices using summarized totals, separate the negatives from the positive amounts, and flag negative amounts as non-taxable<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Returning error &#039;invoice not found&#039; when invoice billing company was different than payment billing company<br /> *SQLink/Added/Help function - given an invoice number, return all invoice IDs found in QB, and all invoice IDs found in SME for that number<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/05/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.57/8.1.3.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Payments/Modified/Added new parameter for online payments<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/28/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.56&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Forms no longer open in Edit mode unless something is actually changing on the form<br /> *Customer/Fixed/Error adding Prepaid hours<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Misspelling on form<br /> *Orders/Fixed/When converting set the &#039;Is Partial&#039; flag on the order task records<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Set the &#039;Is Fixed&#039; flag after calculating with the partial billable hours. This will allow the changing of Billable hours for tracking without affecting the order total<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Order task records with the &#039;Is Partial&#039; flag set will not implement changes<br /> *PO/Fixed/Error when receiving allocated items on an order<br /> *Payments/Modified/Will now accept a partial payment<br /> *Incoming Email/Modified/Now use phone number or email to parse out which company the incoming email is to generate a ticket for<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/23/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.55/SQLink 8.1.3.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Contacts/Modified/When adding new contacts, IF there is no customer UID set on the record, set the customer UID to the order UID. <br /> *Contacts/Modified/Tech Code to set Customer UID to Order UID on contacts with blank customer UID<br /> *System/Snapshot/Widen total fields due to issue when converting from old versions of SMP<br /> *Contacts/Added/Tech Code to update phones from contacts if the phone is on the contact but not the master table<br /> *Orders/Modified/Delete from Contacts if the Customer UID = Order UID<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/20/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.54/SQLink 8.1.3.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Reconciliation/Added Grouping to the editor grid<br /> *Inventory/Reconciliation/Added order number when item getting modified is on an order<br /> *SQLink/Postsynch/Set flags based on date and if exported &#039;When possible&#039; (Not possible for tech time and subcontractor)<br /> *SQLink/GL/Fixed formatting on GL export Total Amount<br /> *SQLink/Auto Logging/Save the log to a file when records exceed 5k. (Usually only happens on an initial import)<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/17.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.53&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation set up to utilize the batch id for tracking<br /> *Contacts/Modified/When canceling an order/invoice/proposal - Remove contacts added when a new customer record has been started in a module other than the customer module<br /> *System/Added/Tech code to clear out all contacts without a customer UID<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Order task records were not always updating when changed<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Item Editor was not always applying the Force JIT option when it was set<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.52&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation functionality testing<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.51/SQLink 8.1.3.13 &#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added color for items that are on PO / New Functionality<br /> *System/Setup/Added PO Received order status / New Functionality<br /> *System/Modified/User Group Override Labor cost functionality / New Functionality<br /> *Customer/Added/Default Order Status for Open &amp; Closed / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/PO Order Status setting / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Service Code default status / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/PO status logic - if set will notify user when all records are received / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Fill in Service Code from customer, if blank use order / New Functionality<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Text not showing on drop downs due to Font Color / New Functionality<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Color on popup to lighter color / New Functionality<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.25.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.50&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Updates/Change was dropping the DB permissions and was not able to reconnect them while building<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.24.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.49&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Not released<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.19.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.48&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Proposal/Fixed/Copy-Paste not working in Services Requested<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Labor editor not updating when using Bill Status of Equal Scheduled<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Bad field name error when cloning recurring orders<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Refresh added to view since dispatch was returning Record not found on some orders due to not refreshing the view<br /> *Proposal/Fixed/Dot Net error when changing Billing status on task records<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Error when manually generating a recurring order<br /> *System/Modified/Removed POS customers that were created for Point of Sale app which is no longer used<br /> *Recurring/Modified/Option to not generate outgoing emails when orders are entered from the customer portal - New Functionality<br /> *System/Modified/Stop allowing typing if text goes beyond the field length. Match to Customer Portal/Tech Portal<br /> *Setup/Added/Fonts now a system setting - New Functionality<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Transfer fixed so last line is now updated and re-editing is not necessary<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.10.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.47&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Added/Batch info to the order, ID, Batch Date - New Functionality<br /> *Invoice/Added/Create Recurring order form an invoice<br /> *Orders/Added/Create a Recurring order from an order<br /> *Setup/Added/Recurring Order settings as customer defaults - New Functionality<br /> *Invoice/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Orders/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Proposals/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Batch Print/Modified/Now includes Batch Date in the Batch ID dropdown<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/When copying to recurring order, do not copy package breakout items. packages change over time, so their items are not included on recurring orders<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/Can now add packages<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.46/SQLink 8.1.3.12&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Moved change notification from the grid to the table since drop downs were not filling in correctly<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Invalid function error when adding a valid tech to an order<br /> *SQLink/Added/Date range for re-export of data<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.05.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.45/SQLink 8.1.3.11&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Do not prompt for re-export if nothing changed on PO when saving<br /> *SQLink/Modified/For Canadian companies fill item tax info since items are used to set tax status<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Error when deleting a subtotal from Order Items screen<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.04.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.44&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/F10 Search for open PO&#039;s<br /> *System/Added/Tools&gt; Advanced&gt; Set default font on memo fields - New functionality<br /> *Invoice/Fixed/Adding items to an itemized invoice causing errors<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.02.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.43&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Added/To Be emailed and To Be Printed to Details and Settings tab<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.42/8.1.3.10&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Views/Modified/Filters always case sensitive<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Do not export employee info from SME if Tech Time unchecked <br /> *SQLink/Added/Resync date so user can select how far back in SME history to go <br /> *SQLink/Modified/All open invoices will be exported, only payments tied to invoices will be exported, only PO&#039;s with received items will be exported<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.25.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.41/8.1.3.8&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Payments/Added/Refund payment transaction info<br /> *Payments/Added/Added payment methods for online refunds<br /> *Payments/Added/Never allow export of refunded online payments<br /> *SQLink/Added/Pull in tax/Non Tax if not already pulled in<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Bad field name on tax logic<br /> *System/Fixed/Errors when converting custom tables from older versions<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.17.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.40&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch Print/Modified/Added drop down for batch printing orders<br /> *Batch Print/Added/Batch ID to grid batch printing orders<br /> *Batch Print/Added/Column customization to grid<br /> *Orders/Modified/Proposal/Order/Project triggers to only total if something changed<br /> *Payments/Added/Refund payment logic<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.39&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Recurring Order/Fixed/Invoice drop down not filling<br /> *Orders/Added/Settings to maintain recurring batch order information<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.14.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.38&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Setup/Credit Card Processing/Allow editing of settings<br /> *System/Batch ID&#039;s/Added &#039;last&#039; batch run to tables<br /> *System/Tables/Added Is Clone if originated from a cloned record<br /> *Recurring Order/Added/Convert as invoice and bypass order<br /> *System/Added/setting for running batches on Recurring orders, recurring invoices, scheduled services<br /> *Customer/Added/If the customer is inactive clear credit card info<br /> *Orders-PO&#039;s/Added/Do not send emails until cloning is finished <br /> *System/Added/setting for running batches on Recurring orders, recurring invoices, scheduled services<br /> *System/Added/Auto generate recurring invoices/orders/services - New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Added : If the user is flagged to do the batch processes, (Preferences), check to see if the system flag has been set for batch (i.e. user flagged to do periodic maintenance, recurring settings have PM setup as &#039;include in batch). If set, use the batch processing for generation. This will be needed unless/until the site schedules jobs to do the batch processing instead. Batches now run the generation without interrupting SME processing.<br /> *System/Modified/Don&#039;t generate activity unless there is a record count<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.10.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.37&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Customer/Added/Customer/Store Credit Card grid<br /> *Setup/Added/Setup/Company/System/Enable Pay Pro flag<br /> *Invoice/Added/Pay Online option<br /> *Payments/Added/Pay Online option<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Do not override Cost/Price in the item editor when selecting stock<br /> *System/Modified/If a user is Inactive turn off the Logged In Flag<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.36&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Order tax handling <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.04.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.35/SQLink 8.1.2.7&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/DYN Export/Break out export files by month<br /> *System/Added/Table to store Credit card info per customer<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Added clear QB ID on PO tables<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Now matches existing wage item if it exists in SME<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.03.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.34&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/DYN Export/All exported invoices go out as &#039;in&#039;<br /> *System/Updates/Only rebuild indexes on tables with a modified structure<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.30.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.33/SQLink 8.1.2.6&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to stop importing vendors from QB and only export from SME to QB<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to clear all QB UID&#039;s and other imported QB info to allow SME to sync with a new QB Company file<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Only use the QB UID for searching in QB for an existing item on a re-sync<br /> *PO/Fixed/Bad field name in a PO export query<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.32/SQLink 8.1.1.5&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Added a tech code to turn off SQLink if a customer decided to stop using QB<br /> *System/DYN Export/Show QB ID flag<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Export of Partner Discounts to always be a positive number<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.21.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.31&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Data not getting set correctly if editing after closing the PO<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Creating multiple material detail records when : the cost had changed AND the item was not serialized AND the available quantity &lt; the po Item quantity (which resulted in a split condition)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.30&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Work Groups to the Assigned To lists for selection<br /> *System/Added/If the Assigned To is a Work Group set all new tasks for the Work Group<br /> *System/Added/Work Group editor added email field<br /> *Orders/Added/Work Group query for reporting<br /> *Orders/Added/Salesperson to Order Status table<br /> *Orders/Added/Work Group logic on item editor<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Check Work Group emails for Auto Outgoing emails<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Added salesperson to Auto Outgoing emails<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Work Group to task emails. If work group exists and has non blank email, use that email, otherwise, use tech&#039;s/vendor&#039;s email<br /> *Routines/Fixed/Misspelling of salesperson causing emails to stop going out<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.15.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.29&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Orders/Modified/Items can now be imported from Excel to fill purchase orders<br /> *System/Modified/No longer reports an error if license check fails<br /> *System/Modified/Grid speed issues <br /> *System/Modified/Set options on new databases<br /> *System/Modified/Hide Web Reports Option unless Web Reports are enabled on the database<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Right Click menu item &#039;Email Ticket&#039; now calls same form as the orders modules<br /> *System/Added/Option to disable multi-threading on grids for Windows 8 and server 2012<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.12.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.28&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Menu item to toggle all print flags if some are set they will clear and the others will set<br /> *RMA/Modified/When receiving RMA Item, if the permanent removal is not checked, always treat it as if the &#039;replace item&#039; were.<br /> *Orders/Modified/Some orders were never going to 100% invoiced due to item deletion and addition after initial invoice<br /> *System/Conversion/Triggers not correctly set when converting from versions prior to 8.0<br /> *System/Auto Email/Custom fields that match between modules were not getting filled in on automatically generated orders<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.09.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.27&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Editor on Material Detail tab was not filling information correctly<br /> *System/Conversion/Corrected auto run tech code<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.08.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.26&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Add to Company Equipment flag dropped when adding them to an order<br /> *System/Modified/Dynamics data export<br /> *System/Fixed/Message when logging into a database other than the default in multi database systems<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.07.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.25&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Further disabling of grid sorting<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Tax formatting was three places<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.24&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Limit license check to 2 tries before defaulting to temporary status<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.05.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.23&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Dataset not on edit mode<br /> *System/Modified/Temporary disabling of grids calling multiple table queries to fill the results<br /> *System/Added/Excel export to .xlsx extensions<br /> *System/Fixed/Data file path for the Grid Excel export option<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.18.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.22&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Modified/Material Editor/Location now read when the item is selected to avoid warehouse issues<br /> *System/Modified/Class now carries from Service Items through all modules to invoices<br /> *System/Modified/Maintenance Contract numbers now carry through in the ref# field to invoices generated from recurring invoices <br /> *Orders/Modified/Material Editor/Changing the warehouse on an item that was using a different warehouse no longer auto transfers the stock to the newly selected location<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.17.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.21&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Dynamics data export<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Labor Editor had an infinite loop when changing billable amount. Only happened when it was not associated with a scheduled amount change<br /> *System/Modified/Maintenance/Warranty Expiration/Now checks that minimum dates are set since if they are not SME could generate false records<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.17.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.20&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Auto Email/Fixed/Subject line character restrictions for special characters<br /> *System/Export/Modified Dynamics export<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.16.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.19&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Update now pulls from 8.1 update FTP folders<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.15.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.18&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Issue with Contract Number on editor<br /> *System/Fixed/Form Code not pulling in custom tab when form code is used<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Only reduce counts if they are greater than the received count<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.12.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.17/SQLink 8.1.1.3&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Journal entries not displaying on entering the tab<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.10.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.16/SQLink 8.1.1.2&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/PO Account ID in Link options<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to ignore the customer when only Billing Customers are stored in QuickBooks<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.08.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Export for Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.08.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Export for Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.06.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Export method for text export to MS Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.05.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.13&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/HTML text editor update to fix pasting images into SME<br /> *System/Fixed/Conversion when database names do not match SQL conventions<br /> *System/Modified/Error log messages<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.03.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.12&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/incorrect field name in vendor items query<br /> *System/Modified/Locking of data in SQL <br /> *System/Modified/Reduced attempts to write locked data from 10 tries to 5 in SQL <br /> *Orders/Service Items/Fixed/Issue when writing Class Name on Recurring generation<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.02.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.11&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Contacts/Filter by both Site and Billing<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Adding item to PO that was created from an order would fill in the order number<br /> *Maintenance Contracts/Fixed/Updating maintenance contract was resetting the Recurring Invoice start date<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.01.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.10&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Users/Fixed/Code value updates with user name changes<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Moved more processes to tables as opposed to temp tables<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Grid issue when selecting multiple items from the Partial Invoice screen was causing SME to crash<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Assets moved from temp table to permanent table<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Voided orders no longer show in Dispatch<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.24.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.9&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Tech Code/Runs tech code to revert all failed order conversions<br /> *SQLink/Updated/Now updated to SME 8.1<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.19.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.8&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Fields and tables for dynamic export<br /> *System/Added/Logic to fill the dynamic tables<br /> *Packages/Fixed/Error calculating package item totals when price is generated<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.18.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.7&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Error scrolling records when no options are set on settings tab<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Error when scrolling through combined invoices on the Service/Install tabs<br /> *Batch PO/Fixed/Trigger not getting re-initialized when updating<br /> *Recurring Invoices/Fixed/Error when posting Recurring Invoices.<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.12.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.6&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Batch PO/Added Item Number to grid<br /> *System/Modified/Orders/Made Require Service Code an option <br /> *System/Modified/Order/Added Allocated warning when adding orders to combined invoices<br /> *System/Modified/Order handling from SME Mobile was causing occasional duplicate order UID&#039;s<br /> *System/Fixed/Error logging and record update time/out issues<br /> *System/Fixed/Saving records under Customer Equipment was not writing info to the new table but placing them in the old table<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.11.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.5&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Fixed/Edit function in grid stopped working<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.7.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.4&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Activities/Fixed/Alarms returning way too many records after database rebuild<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.6.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.3&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Orders/History tabs not saving settings and displaying correctly<br /> *Proposals/Fixed/Fixed rates tab not calculating <br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Transfers not completing the last record on multiple record transfers<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.4.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.2&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Add/Zone filter to Proposal/Orders/Invoices to prevent &#039;Cannot add to order when adding from Dispatch&#039;<br /> *System/Add/Use Dispatch view for lookups when adding to dispatch. In some cases you may not see a refresh if you are on service and drag a proposal to dispatch<br /> *System/Fixed/Error when adding new records. UID was initialized in the incorrect place. Causing prompts for SLA &amp; Class re-initialization <br /> *System/Modified/Tech certification check only if there are labor task records<br /> *System/Updated/to latest component sets on all grids/dispatch controls/reporting controls/and data controls<br /> *System/Fixed/Batch PO/Filters not functioning as planned<br /> *System/Fixed/Error message on shutting down SME<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 10.31.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.1&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Added/Button to only close modified PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Added/Button for full regenerate of all PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Fill table now only fills required PO&#039;s instead of all PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Grid settings to improve speed<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Only add missing records to the grid instead of completely reloading the grid<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 10.30.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.1&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Dispatch id&#039;s to tech, vendor, service, install, proposal, invoice<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Uses temp table for labor, uses view data vs query and updates ( Now the ID&#039;s necessary for dispatch are on the tables)<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Tracked and fixed &#039;missing&#039; field errors when adding labor from project<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Creates view for labor and orders<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Modified/Added button to only close GENERATED records<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Added button for FULL regenerate<br /> *Purchase Order Bulk Import/Modified/Fill table now only generates REQUIRED records, vs all 5000 records<br /> *Purchase Order Bulk Import/Modified/Required records defined as &#039;close all records that have been generated or have a defined minimum level.<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Fixed/Grid settings to speedup process<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Modified/Only &#039;missing&#039; records are regenerated.</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_8.1_-_Revision_History&diff=5884 SME 8.1 - Revision History 2015-06-10T15:34:14Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>&#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /06/03/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.63&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation now has closed flag for physical count batches<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Reconciliation dates getting set on items that were loaded in the batch but not adjusted<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation - close all batches before creating a new batch<br /> *Inventory/Added/Inventory Reconciliation history table<br /> *Inventory/Added/Ability to reconcile by individual item or by batch<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /06/03/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.62&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Items not getting set as received if the items were in a package<br /> *Orders/Added/Site Notes to Notes menu<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/More fixes on Stock tab/Add Stock editor<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /05/28/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.61/SQLink 8.1.4.21&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Material editor error editing material<br /> *Customer Equipment/Fixed/Error adding equipment from the Customer Equipment module<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Item Editor Vendor Item search not loading<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Customer Equipment PO Status was not updating when an item was placed on a PO<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/PO Item tab order number filled in wrong when the PO was created from a cloned order<br /> *Orders/Added/Site Notes to Notes menu<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/More fixes on Stock tab/Add Stock editor<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Invoices were exporting to QB with all items as non-tax due to changes in Canadian logic<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /05/27/2015/ Version: 8.1.4.60/SQLink 8.1.4.20&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Taxes/When calculating taxes do not round line items only round the Total to match QuickBooks.<br /> *System/Discounts/Set up Order level discounts on line item taxes (order must have a tax group or code).<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Stock Add form was calling the incorrect form.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Taxing to depend on the line item, not the inventory item.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Flagging taxable as false on records with float values for the field type.<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Tax details sometimes filtered out when calculating Canadian item taxes.<br /> *System/Tax/Over rounding on tax line items.<br /> *System/Fixed/Taxes discounts in QuickBooks Canadian only apply to items with &#039;matching&#039; tax codes - i.e. if you have 3 items with HST, one item with P, and the item discount has &#039;HST&#039; code (and is applied before taxes), SME will only apply to the three HST items.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Flag to not update contacts between SME and QB. If Checked contacts will not import/export.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Flag to not set SME prefix.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Use PO Reference Number to SQLink options.<br /> *SQLink/Added/PO Items Not Billable to options. If set status on items will be Billable.<br /> *SQLink/Added/Tech Code, 360, to set the merge date on all fields so all info is not synced after a QuickBooks upgrade/update<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: /05/18/2015/ Version: 8.1.2.59 - Limited Released/SQLink 8.1.3.19&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Setup/Taxes - set up SME to work in Canadian versions without QB<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/12/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.58/8.1.3.17&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Don&#039;t export reverse credits (auto generated in payments from invoices with negative balances)<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/08/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.58/8.1.3.16&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/When doing a resynch, don&#039;t flag overpayments and balancing payment for export<br /> *SQLink/Added/When exporting invoices using summarized totals, separate the negatives from the positive amounts, and flag negative amounts as non-taxable<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Returning error &#039;invoice not found&#039; when invoice billing company was different than payment billing company<br /> *SQLink/Added/Help function - given an invoice number, return all invoice IDs found in QB, and all invoice IDs found in SME for that number<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 05/05/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.57/8.1.3.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Payments/Modified/Added new parameter for online payments<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/28/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.56&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Forms no longer open in Edit mode unless something is actually changing on the form<br /> *Customer/Fixed/Error adding Prepaid hours<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Misspelling on form<br /> *Orders/Fixed/When converting set the &#039;Is Partial&#039; flag on the order task records<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Set the &#039;Is Fixed&#039; flag after calculating with the partial billable hours. This will allow the changing of Billable hours for tracking without affecting the order total<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Order task records with the &#039;Is Partial&#039; flag set will not implement changes<br /> *PO/Fixed/Error when receiving allocated items on an order<br /> *Payments/Modified/Will now accept a partial payment<br /> *Incoming Email/Modified/Now use phone number or email to parse out which company the incoming email is to generate a ticket for<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/23/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.55/SQLink 8.1.3.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Contacts/Modified/When adding new contacts, IF there is no customer UID set on the record, set the customer UID to the order UID. <br /> *Contacts/Modified/Tech Code to set Customer UID to Order UID on contacts with blank customer UID<br /> *System/Snapshot/Widen total fields due to issue when converting from old versions of SMP<br /> *Contacts/Added/Tech Code to update phones from contacts if the phone is on the contact but not the master table<br /> *Orders/Modified/Delete from Contacts if the Customer UID = Order UID<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/20/2015/ Version: 8.1.3.54/SQLink 8.1.3.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Reconciliation/Added Grouping to the editor grid<br /> *Inventory/Reconciliation/Added order number when item getting modified is on an order<br /> *SQLink/Postsynch/Set flags based on date and if exported &#039;When possible&#039; (Not possible for tech time and subcontractor)<br /> *SQLink/GL/Fixed formatting on GL export Total Amount<br /> *SQLink/Auto Logging/Save the log to a file when records exceed 5k. (Usually only happens on an initial import)<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04/17.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.53&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation set up to utilize the batch id for tracking<br /> *Contacts/Modified/When canceling an order/invoice/proposal - Remove contacts added when a new customer record has been started in a module other than the customer module<br /> *System/Added/Tech code to clear out all contacts without a customer UID<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Order task records were not always updating when changed<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Item Editor was not always applying the Force JIT option when it was set<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 04.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.52&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Modified/Reconciliation functionality testing<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.51/SQLink 8.1.3.13 &#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added color for items that are on PO / New Functionality<br /> *System/Setup/Added PO Received order status / New Functionality<br /> *System/Modified/User Group Override Labor cost functionality / New Functionality<br /> *Customer/Added/Default Order Status for Open &amp; Closed / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/PO Order Status setting / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Service Code default status / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/PO status logic - if set will notify user when all records are received / New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Fill in Service Code from customer, if blank use order / New Functionality<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Text not showing on drop downs due to Font Color / New Functionality<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Color on popup to lighter color / New Functionality<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.25.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.50&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Updates/Change was dropping the DB permissions and was not able to reconnect them while building<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.24.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.49&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Not released<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.19.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.48&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Proposal/Fixed/Copy-Paste not working in Services Requested<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Labor editor not updating when using Bill Status of Equal Scheduled<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Bad field name error when cloning recurring orders<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Refresh added to view since dispatch was returning Record not found on some orders due to not refreshing the view<br /> *Proposal/Fixed/Dot Net error when changing Billing status on task records<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Error when manually generating a recurring order<br /> *System/Modified/Removed POS customers that were created for Point of Sale app which is no longer used<br /> *Recurring/Modified/Option to not generate outgoing emails when orders are entered from the customer portal - New Functionality<br /> *System/Modified/Stop allowing typing if text goes beyond the field length. Match to Customer Portal/Tech Portal<br /> *Setup/Added/Fonts now a system setting - New Functionality<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Transfer fixed so last line is now updated and re-editing is not necessary<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.10.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.47&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Added/Batch info to the order, ID, Batch Date - New Functionality<br /> *Invoice/Added/Create Recurring order form an invoice<br /> *Orders/Added/Create a Recurring order from an order<br /> *Setup/Added/Recurring Order settings as customer defaults - New Functionality<br /> *Invoice/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Orders/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Proposals/Added/Menu items for updating related recurring info and adding the invoice to batch print - New Functionality<br /> *Batch Print/Modified/Now includes Batch Date in the Batch ID dropdown<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/When copying to recurring order, do not copy package breakout items. packages change over time, so their items are not included on recurring orders<br /> *Recurring Orders/Modified/Can now add packages<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.46/SQLink 8.1.3.12&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Moved change notification from the grid to the table since drop downs were not filling in correctly<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Invalid function error when adding a valid tech to an order<br /> *SQLink/Added/Date range for re-export of data<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.05.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.45/SQLink 8.1.3.11&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Do not prompt for re-export if nothing changed on PO when saving<br /> *SQLink/Modified/For Canadian companies fill item tax info since items are used to set tax status<br /> *Recurring Orders/Fixed/Error when deleting a subtotal from Order Items screen<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.04.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.44&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/F10 Search for open PO&#039;s<br /> *System/Added/Tools&gt; Advanced&gt; Set default font on memo fields - New functionality<br /> *Invoice/Fixed/Adding items to an itemized invoice causing errors<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 03.02.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.43&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Added/To Be emailed and To Be Printed to Details and Settings tab<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.42/8.1.3.10&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Views/Modified/Filters always case sensitive<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Do not export employee info from SME if Tech Time unchecked <br /> *SQLink/Added/Resync date so user can select how far back in SME history to go <br /> *SQLink/Modified/All open invoices will be exported, only payments tied to invoices will be exported, only PO&#039;s with received items will be exported<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.25.2015/ Version: 8.1.3.41/8.1.3.8&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Payments/Added/Refund payment transaction info<br /> *Payments/Added/Added payment methods for online refunds<br /> *Payments/Added/Never allow export of refunded online payments<br /> *SQLink/Added/Pull in tax/Non Tax if not already pulled in<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Bad field name on tax logic<br /> *System/Fixed/Errors when converting custom tables from older versions<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.17.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.40&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch Print/Modified/Added drop down for batch printing orders<br /> *Batch Print/Added/Batch ID to grid batch printing orders<br /> *Batch Print/Added/Column customization to grid<br /> *Orders/Modified/Proposal/Order/Project triggers to only total if something changed<br /> *Payments/Added/Refund payment logic<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.39&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Recurring Order/Fixed/Invoice drop down not filling<br /> *Orders/Added/Settings to maintain recurring batch order information<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.14.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.38&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Setup/Credit Card Processing/Allow editing of settings<br /> *System/Batch ID&#039;s/Added &#039;last&#039; batch run to tables<br /> *System/Tables/Added Is Clone if originated from a cloned record<br /> *Recurring Order/Added/Convert as invoice and bypass order<br /> *System/Added/setting for running batches on Recurring orders, recurring invoices, scheduled services<br /> *Customer/Added/If the customer is inactive clear credit card info<br /> *Orders-PO&#039;s/Added/Do not send emails until cloning is finished <br /> *System/Added/setting for running batches on Recurring orders, recurring invoices, scheduled services<br /> *System/Added/Auto generate recurring invoices/orders/services - New Functionality<br /> *System/Added/Added : If the user is flagged to do the batch processes, (Preferences), check to see if the system flag has been set for batch (i.e. user flagged to do periodic maintenance, recurring settings have PM setup as &#039;include in batch). If set, use the batch processing for generation. This will be needed unless/until the site schedules jobs to do the batch processing instead. Batches now run the generation without interrupting SME processing.<br /> *System/Modified/Don&#039;t generate activity unless there is a record count<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.10.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.37&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Customer/Added/Customer/Store Credit Card grid<br /> *Setup/Added/Setup/Company/System/Enable Pay Pro flag<br /> *Invoice/Added/Pay Online option<br /> *Payments/Added/Pay Online option<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Do not override Cost/Price in the item editor when selecting stock<br /> *System/Modified/If a user is Inactive turn off the Logged In Flag<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.36&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Order tax handling <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.04.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.35/SQLink 8.1.2.7&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/DYN Export/Break out export files by month<br /> *System/Added/Table to store Credit card info per customer<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Added clear QB ID on PO tables<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Now matches existing wage item if it exists in SME<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 02.03.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.34&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/DYN Export/All exported invoices go out as &#039;in&#039;<br /> *System/Updates/Only rebuild indexes on tables with a modified structure<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.30.2015/ Version: 8.1.2.33/SQLink 8.1.2.6&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to stop importing vendors from QB and only export from SME to QB<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to clear all QB UID&#039;s and other imported QB info to allow SME to sync with a new QB Company file<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Only use the QB UID for searching in QB for an existing item on a re-sync<br /> *PO/Fixed/Bad field name in a PO export query<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.27.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.32/SQLink 8.1.1.5&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Added a tech code to turn off SQLink if a customer decided to stop using QB<br /> *System/DYN Export/Show QB ID flag<br /> *SQLink/Modified/Export of Partner Discounts to always be a positive number<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.21.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.31&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Data not getting set correctly if editing after closing the PO<br /> *Purchase Orders/Fixed/Creating multiple material detail records when : the cost had changed AND the item was not serialized AND the available quantity &lt; the po Item quantity (which resulted in a split condition)<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.16.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.30&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Work Groups to the Assigned To lists for selection<br /> *System/Added/If the Assigned To is a Work Group set all new tasks for the Work Group<br /> *System/Added/Work Group editor added email field<br /> *Orders/Added/Work Group query for reporting<br /> *Orders/Added/Salesperson to Order Status table<br /> *Orders/Added/Work Group logic on item editor<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Check Work Group emails for Auto Outgoing emails<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Added salesperson to Auto Outgoing emails<br /> *Auto Email/Added/Work Group to task emails. If work group exists and has non blank email, use that email, otherwise, use tech&#039;s/vendor&#039;s email<br /> *Routines/Fixed/Misspelling of salesperson causing emails to stop going out<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.15.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.29&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Purchase Orders/Modified/Items can now be imported from Excel to fill purchase orders<br /> *System/Modified/No longer reports an error if license check fails<br /> *System/Modified/Grid speed issues <br /> *System/Modified/Set options on new databases<br /> *System/Modified/Hide Web Reports Option unless Web Reports are enabled on the database<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Right Click menu item &#039;Email Ticket&#039; now calls same form as the orders modules<br /> *System/Added/Option to disable multi-threading on grids for Windows 8 and server 2012<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.12.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.28&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Menu item to toggle all print flags if some are set they will clear and the others will set<br /> *RMA/Modified/When receiving RMA Item, if the permanent removal is not checked, always treat it as if the &#039;replace item&#039; were.<br /> *Orders/Modified/Some orders were never going to 100% invoiced due to item deletion and addition after initial invoice<br /> *System/Conversion/Triggers not correctly set when converting from versions prior to 8.0<br /> *System/Auto Email/Custom fields that match between modules were not getting filled in on automatically generated orders<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.09.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.27&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Editor on Material Detail tab was not filling information correctly<br /> *System/Conversion/Corrected auto run tech code<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.08.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.26&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Add to Company Equipment flag dropped when adding them to an order<br /> *System/Modified/Dynamics data export<br /> *System/Fixed/Message when logging into a database other than the default in multi database systems<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.07.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.25&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Further disabling of grid sorting<br /> *SQLink/Fixed/Tax formatting was three places<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.06.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.24&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Limit license check to 2 tries before defaulting to temporary status<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 01.05.2015/ Version: 8.1.1.23&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Dataset not on edit mode<br /> *System/Modified/Temporary disabling of grids calling multiple table queries to fill the results<br /> *System/Added/Excel export to .xlsx extensions<br /> *System/Fixed/Data file path for the Grid Excel export option<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.18.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.22&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Modified/Material Editor/Location now read when the item is selected to avoid warehouse issues<br /> *System/Modified/Class now carries from Service Items through all modules to invoices<br /> *System/Modified/Maintenance Contract numbers now carry through in the ref# field to invoices generated from recurring invoices <br /> *Orders/Modified/Material Editor/Changing the warehouse on an item that was using a different warehouse no longer auto transfers the stock to the newly selected location<br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.17.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.21&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Dynamics data export<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Labor Editor had an infinite loop when changing billable amount. Only happened when it was not associated with a scheduled amount change<br /> *System/Modified/Maintenance/Warranty Expiration/Now checks that minimum dates are set since if they are not SME could generate false records<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.17.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.20&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Auto Email/Fixed/Subject line character restrictions for special characters<br /> *System/Export/Modified Dynamics export<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.16.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.19&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Update now pulls from 8.1 update FTP folders<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.15.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.18&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Issue with Contract Number on editor<br /> *System/Fixed/Form Code not pulling in custom tab when form code is used<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Only reduce counts if they are greater than the received count<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.12.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.17/SQLink 8.1.1.3&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Journal entries not displaying on entering the tab<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.10.2014/ Version: 8.1.1.16/SQLink 8.1.1.2&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/PO Account ID in Link options<br /> *SQLink/Added/Option to ignore the customer when only Billing Customers are stored in QuickBooks<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.08.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Export for Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.08.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.15&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Export for Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.06.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.14&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Export method for text export to MS Dynamics<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.05.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.13&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/HTML text editor update to fix pasting images into SME<br /> *System/Fixed/Conversion when database names do not match SQL conventions<br /> *System/Modified/Error log messages<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.03.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.12&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Inventory/Fixed/incorrect field name in vendor items query<br /> *System/Modified/Locking of data in SQL <br /> *System/Modified/Reduced attempts to write locked data from 10 tries to 5 in SQL <br /> *Orders/Service Items/Fixed/Issue when writing Class Name on Recurring generation<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.02.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.11&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Contacts/Filter by both Site and Billing<br /> *Purchase Order/Fixed/Adding item to PO that was created from an order would fill in the order number<br /> *Maintenance Contracts/Fixed/Updating maintenance contract was resetting the Recurring Invoice start date<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 12.01.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.10&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Users/Fixed/Code value updates with user name changes<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Moved more processes to tables as opposed to temp tables<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Grid issue when selecting multiple items from the Partial Invoice screen was causing SME to crash<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Assets moved from temp table to permanent table<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Voided orders no longer show in Dispatch<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.24.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.9&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Tech Code/Runs tech code to revert all failed order conversions<br /> *SQLink/Updated/Now updated to SME 8.1<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.19.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.8&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Added/Fields and tables for dynamic export<br /> *System/Added/Logic to fill the dynamic tables<br /> *Packages/Fixed/Error calculating package item totals when price is generated<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.18.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.7&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Dispatch/Fixed/Error scrolling records when no options are set on settings tab<br /> *Orders/Fixed/Error when scrolling through combined invoices on the Service/Install tabs<br /> *Batch PO/Fixed/Trigger not getting re-initialized when updating<br /> *Recurring Invoices/Fixed/Error when posting Recurring Invoices.<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.12.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.6&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Modified/Batch PO/Added Item Number to grid<br /> *System/Modified/Orders/Made Require Service Code an option <br /> *System/Modified/Order/Added Allocated warning when adding orders to combined invoices<br /> *System/Modified/Order handling from SME Mobile was causing occasional duplicate order UID&#039;s<br /> *System/Fixed/Error logging and record update time/out issues<br /> *System/Fixed/Saving records under Customer Equipment was not writing info to the new table but placing them in the old table<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.11.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.5&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Fixed/Edit function in grid stopped working<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.7.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.4&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Activities/Fixed/Alarms returning way too many records after database rebuild<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.6.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.3&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Fixed/Orders/History tabs not saving settings and displaying correctly<br /> *Proposals/Fixed/Fixed rates tab not calculating <br /> *Inventory/Fixed/Transfers not completing the last record on multiple record transfers<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 11.4.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.2&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *System/Add/Zone filter to Proposal/Orders/Invoices to prevent &#039;Cannot add to order when adding from Dispatch&#039;<br /> *System/Add/Use Dispatch view for lookups when adding to dispatch. In some cases you may not see a refresh if you are on service and drag a proposal to dispatch<br /> *System/Fixed/Error when adding new records. UID was initialized in the incorrect place. Causing prompts for SLA &amp; Class re-initialization <br /> *System/Modified/Tech certification check only if there are labor task records<br /> *System/Updated/to latest component sets on all grids/dispatch controls/reporting controls/and data controls<br /> *System/Fixed/Batch PO/Filters not functioning as planned<br /> *System/Fixed/Error message on shutting down SME<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 10.31.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.1&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Batch PO/Added/Button to only close modified PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Added/Button for full regenerate of all PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Fill table now only fills required PO&#039;s instead of all PO&#039;s<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Grid settings to improve speed<br /> *Batch PO/Modified/Only add missing records to the grid instead of completely reloading the grid<br /> <br /> <br /> &#039;&#039;&#039;Date: / 10.30.2014/ Version: 8.1.0.1&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Dispatch id&#039;s to tech, vendor, service, install, proposal, invoice<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Uses temp table for labor, uses view data vs query and updates ( Now the ID&#039;s necessary for dispatch are on the tables)<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Tracked and fixed &#039;missing&#039; field errors when adding labor from project<br /> *Dispatch/Modified/Creates view for labor and orders<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Modified/Added button to only close GENERATED records<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Added button for FULL regenerate<br /> *Purchase Order Bulk Import/Modified/Fill table now only generates REQUIRED records, vs all 5000 records<br /> *Purchase Order Bulk Import/Modified/Required records defined as &#039;close all records that have been generated or have a defined minimum level.<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Fixed/Grid settings to speedup process<br /> *Purchase Order Batch PO/Modified/Only &#039;missing&#039; records are regenerated.</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Payments&diff=5880 Payments 2015-06-05T17:35:15Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>You can enter payments either from an invoice or directly in Payments and apply the payment to an open invoice. If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks, payments can be entered either in SME or QuickBooks.<br /> <br /> If you are looking for information on taking payments from Mobile see [[Mobile Payments]]<br /> <br /> Click this link for suggestion on [[Bad Debt Write-off]]<br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Go to the invoice for which you are receiving payment.<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Enter Payment&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:InvoicePaymentsTab_EnterPayment.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. SME will jump to the Payments section of the Receivables module.<br /> <br /> [[File:Payments.jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;5. Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Method of Payment&#039;&#039;&#039; and fill out the payment information such as check number.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:MethodOfPayment.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;6. Confirm the amount in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The balance on the invoice will populate the Payment Amount field automatically.<br /> &lt;br&gt;7. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;8. The Confirm window will provide a summary of the ending balance. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment and apply to open invoices ==<br /> You can receive payment in Receivables &gt; Payments, then select the open invoice you want to apply the payment to for that customer.<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Go to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Receivables&#039;&#039;&#039; module &gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. In the Search window that opens, double click on the customer you are receiving payment for.<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. In the Payment:<br /> * &#039;&#039;&#039;Details and Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab – enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; and select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Method of Payment&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> <br /> <br /> [[File:Payment_DetailsSettins.jpg]]<br /> <br /> <br /> *&#039;&#039;&#039;Disbursements&#039;&#039;&#039; tab – view all invoices for the company, the total and balance on the invoice, and the payment on the invoice. You can check which invoice you want to apply the payment towards. If you need to, you can check more than one invoice to apply the payment to by checking the &#039;&#039;&#039;apply&#039;&#039;&#039; checkbox.<br /> <br /> <br /> [[File:Payments_Disbursements.jpg]]<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;5. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;6. The Confirm window will provide a summary of the invoices the payment was applied to and the ending balances.<br /> <br /> <br /> [[File:confirmPayment.jpg]]<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;7. Click OK.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Payment Status ==<br /> At the top of a payment, you will see the status of the payment as shown in the image below.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:paymentStatus.jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Distributed&#039;&#039;&#039; - The payment was applied to an invoice.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Open Balance&#039;&#039;&#039; - This is a payment that was entered for a customer that didn’t have an invoice to apply it to.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Applied Deposit&#039;&#039;&#039; - In SME you can enter a deposit for a customer. When you generate an invoice for the customer, SME will apply the deposit to the invoice and mark the invoice with the Applied Deposit stamp.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;QB Payment&#039;&#039;&#039; - Indicates the payment was entered in QuickBooks and synced to SME. Any QB Payment in SME cannot be edited in SME, only in QuickBooks.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Unapplied Payments ==<br /> If you enter a payment in SME that isn&#039;t applied to an invoice, it will stay in SME and won&#039;t sync to QuickBooks until it is applied to an invoice. We only send the payment over to QB when it is applied to an invoice. <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;You can enter an unapplied payment in QB and that will come into SME, but you can&#039;t apply that payment to an invoice in SME, you would have to apply it to an invoice in QuickBooks.<br /> <br /> == OpenEdge Payment Processing ==<br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-36-17_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;Enter in payment information for either Check or Credit Card<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_9-24-20_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;Scroll down and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Make Payment&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;If the payment is successful you will see a similar screen shown below.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-4-2015_7-33-49_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;The invoice in SME will now reflect that the payment has been made.</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Payments&diff=5879 Payments 2015-06-05T17:34:49Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>You can enter payments either from an invoice or directly in Payments and apply the payment to an open invoice. If you are syncing SME with QuickBooks, payments can be entered either in SME or QuickBooks.<br /> <br /> If you are looking for information on taking payments from Mobile see [[Mobile Payments]]<br /> <br /> Click this link for suggestion on [[Bad Debt Write-off]]<br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Go to the invoice for which you are receiving payment.<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab.<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Enter Payment&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:InvoicePaymentsTab_EnterPayment.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. SME will jump to the Payments section of the Receivables module.<br /> <br /> [[File:Payments.jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;5. Select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Method of Payment&#039;&#039;&#039; and fill out the payment information such as check number.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:MethodOfPayment.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;6. Confirm the amount in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; field. The balance on the invoice will populate the Payment Amount field automatically.<br /> &lt;br&gt;7. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;8. The Confirm window will provide a summary of the ending balance. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;OK&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment and apply to open invoices ==<br /> You can receive payment in Receivables &gt; Payments, then select the open invoice you want to apply the payment to for that customer.<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Go to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Receivables&#039;&#039;&#039; module &gt; &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;New&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. In the Search window that opens, double click on the customer you are receiving payment for.<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. In the Payment:<br /> * &#039;&#039;&#039;Details and Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab – enter the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payment Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; and select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Method of Payment&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> <br /> <br /> [[File:Payment_DetailsSettins.jpg]]<br /> <br /> <br /> *&#039;&#039;&#039;Disbursements&#039;&#039;&#039; tab – view all invoices for the company, the total and balance on the invoice, and the payment on the invoice. You can check which invoice you want to apply the payment towards. If you need to, you can check more than one invoice to apply the payment to by checking the &#039;&#039;&#039;apply&#039;&#039;&#039; checkbox.<br /> <br /> <br /> [[File:Payments_Disbursements.jpg]]<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;5. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;.<br /> &lt;br&gt;6. The Confirm window will provide a summary of the invoices the payment was applied to and the ending balances.<br /> <br /> <br /> [[File:confirmPayment.jpg]]<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;7. Click OK.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Payment Status ==<br /> At the top of a payment, you will see the status of the payment as shown in the image below.<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:paymentStatus.jpg]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Distributed&#039;&#039;&#039; - The payment was applied to an invoice.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Open Balance&#039;&#039;&#039; - This is a payment that was entered for a customer that didn’t have an invoice to apply it to.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Applied Deposit&#039;&#039;&#039; - In SME you can enter a deposit for a customer. When you generate an invoice for the customer, SME will apply the deposit to the invoice and mark the invoice with the Applied Deposit stamp.<br /> &lt;br&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;QB Payment&#039;&#039;&#039; - Indicates the payment was entered in QuickBooks and synced to SME. Any QB Payment in SME cannot be edited in SME, only in QuickBooks.<br /> <br /> <br /> == Unapplied Payments ==<br /> If you enter a payment in SME that isn&#039;t applied to an invoice, it will stay in SME and won&#039;t sync to QuickBooks until it is applied to an invoice. We only send the payment over to QB when it is applied to an invoice. <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;You can enter an unapplied payment in QB and that will come into SME, but you can&#039;t apply that payment to an invoice in SME, you would have to apply it to an invoice in QuickBooks.<br /> <br /> == OpenEdge Payment Processing ==</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:6-4-2015_7-33-49_AM.png&diff=5878 File:6-4-2015 7-33-49 AM.png 2015-06-05T17:33:33Z <p>Alexs: uploaded a new version of &amp;quot;File:6-4-2015 7-33-49 AM.png&amp;quot;</p> <hr /> <div></div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:6-2-2015_9-24-20_AM.png&diff=5877 File:6-2-2015 9-24-20 AM.png 2015-06-05T17:32:20Z <p>Alexs: uploaded a new version of &amp;quot;File:6-2-2015 9-24-20 AM.png&amp;quot;</p> <hr /> <div></div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:6-2-2015_8-36-17_AM.png&diff=5876 File:6-2-2015 8-36-17 AM.png 2015-06-05T17:30:16Z <p>Alexs: uploaded a new version of &amp;quot;File:6-2-2015 8-36-17 AM.png&amp;quot;</p> <hr /> <div></div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png&diff=5875 File:6-2-2015 8-27-29 AM.png 2015-06-05T17:28:42Z <p>Alexs: uploaded a new version of &amp;quot;File:6-2-2015 8-27-29 AM.png&amp;quot;</p> <hr /> <div></div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png&diff=5874 File:6-2-2015 8-15-34 AM.png 2015-06-05T17:26:17Z <p>Alexs: uploaded a new version of &amp;quot;File:6-2-2015 8-15-34 AM.png&amp;quot;</p> <hr /> <div></div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5873 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T17:16:33Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-36-17_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;Enter in payment information for either Check or Credit Card<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_9-24-20_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;Scroll down and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Make Payment&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;If the payment is successful you will see a similar screen shown below.<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-4-2015_7-33-49_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;The invoice in SME will now reflect that the payment has been made.</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:6-4-2015_7-33-49_AM.png&diff=5872 File:6-4-2015 7-33-49 AM.png 2015-06-05T17:15:06Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div></div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5871 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T17:13:05Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-36-17_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;Enter in payment information for either Check or Credit Card<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_9-24-20_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;Scroll down and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Make Payment&#039;&#039;&#039;</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5870 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T17:12:41Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-36-17_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Enter in payment information for either Check or Credit Card<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_9-24-20_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;Scroll down and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Make Payment&#039;&#039;&#039;</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5869 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T17:12:17Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-36-17_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;Enter in payment information for either Check or Credit Card<br /> &lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_9-24-20_AM.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;Scroll down and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Make Payment&#039;&#039;&#039;</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5868 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T17:10:33Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-36-17_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;Enter in payment information for either Check or Credit Card<br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_9-24-20_AM.png]]<br /> &lt;br&gt;Scroll down and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Make Payment&#039;&#039;&#039;</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:6-2-2015_9-24-20_AM.png&diff=5867 File:6-2-2015 9-24-20 AM.png 2015-06-05T17:08:43Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div></div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5866 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T17:08:22Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-36-17_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-36-17_AM.png]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5865 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T17:05:13Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-36-17_AM.png]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:6-2-2015_8-36-17_AM.png&diff=5864 File:6-2-2015 8-36-17 AM.png 2015-06-05T17:02:32Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div></div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5863 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T17:01:54Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5862 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T17:00:08Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5861 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T16:59:28Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == ==<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> == ==<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> == ==<br /> The computers default browser will open up the High 5 Hub to the payment details screen for this customers account. *You will need to be logged into the High 5 Hub<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify the correct &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer&#039;&#039;&#039; is displayed<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Number&#039;&#039;&#039;<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Verify &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoice Amount&#039;&#039;&#039; to be charged<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. From drop down menu select appropriate method of payment ie Credit Card or Check<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5860 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T16:47:12Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == ==<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> == ==<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5859 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T16:46:44Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == ==<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoicing&#039;&#039;&#039; section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5858 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T16:44:51Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == ==<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the Invoicing section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Payments&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Online Pay&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5857 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T16:40:18Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == ==<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the Invoicing section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the Payments tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the Online Pay button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5856 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T16:39:05Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == ==<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the Invoicing section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the Payments tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the Online Pay button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:6-2-2015_8-27-29_AM.png&diff=5855 File:6-2-2015 8-27-29 AM.png 2015-06-05T16:38:53Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div></div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5854 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T16:07:16Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == ==<br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify you are in the Invoicing section of the customer account<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the Payments tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the Online Pay button<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5853 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T16:06:09Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]<br /> <br /> == ==</div> Alexs https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=OpenEdge_Payment_Integration&diff=5852 OpenEdge Payment Integration 2015-06-05T16:05:19Z <p>Alexs: </p> <hr /> <div>This guide will explain how to process a check or credit card using SME, The Hub and OpenEdge.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> == Receiving payment on an invoice ==<br /> <br /> <br /> To receive payment for a specific invoice:<br /> <br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;1. Verify correct customer selected<br /> &lt;br&gt;2. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Customer History&#039;&#039;&#039; tab<br /> &lt;br&gt;3. Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Invoices&#039;&#039;&#039; button<br /> &lt;br&gt;4. Locate the correct invoice and double click the invoice to open it up<br /> <br /> &lt;br&gt;[[File:6-2-2015_8-15-34_AM.png]]</div> Alexs